Zyxel Communications Webcam Users Manual

zyxel to the manual 1f110def-26f8-48d1-848e-4f8820ceea74

2015-01-23

: Zyxel Zyxel-Zyxel-Communications-Webcam-Zyxel-Users-Manual-310328 zyxel-zyxel-communications-webcam-zyxel-users-manual-310328 zyxel pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 364 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

www.zyxel.com
www.zyxel.com
P-870HN-51D
802.11n Wireless VDSL2 4-port Gateway
Copyright © 2010
ZyXEL Communications Corporation
Firmware Version 1.01
Edition 1, 07/2010
Default Login Details
IP Address https://192.168.1.1
User Name admin
Password 1234
About This User's Guide
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 3
About This User's Guide
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for people who want to configure the P-870HN-51D using
the web configurator.
Related Documentation
•Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It
contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet
access.
• Support Disc
Refer to the included CD for support documents.
Documentation Feedback
Send your comments, questions or suggestions to: techwriters@zyxel.com.tw
Thank you!
The Technical Writing Team, ZyXEL Communications Corp.,
6 Innovation Road II, Science-Based Industrial Park, Hsinchu, 30099, Taiwan.
Need More Help?
More help is available at www.zyxel.com.
About This User's Guide
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
4
• Download Library
Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link. Read
the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide, Quick
Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better
understand how to use your product.
• Knowledge Base
If you have a specific question about your product, the answer may be here.
This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL
products.
•Forum
This contains discussions on ZyXEL products. Learn from others who use ZyXEL
products and share your experiences as well.
Customer Support
Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above, you
should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a
ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device.
See http://www.zyxel.com/web/contact_us.php for contact information. Please
have the following information ready when you contact an office.
• Product model and serial number.
•Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
Document Conventions
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 5
Document Conventions
Warnings and Notes
These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User’s Guide.
Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.
Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may
need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.
Syntax Conventions
• The P-2812HNU-51c may be referred to as the “P-870HN-51D”, the “device”,
the “system” or the “product” in this User’s Guide.
• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.
• A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example,
[ENTER] means the “enter” or “return” key on your keyboard.
• “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters and then press the
[ENTER] key. “Select” or “choose” means for you to use one of the predefined
choices.
• A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For
example, Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click
Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the
Log Setting tab to get to that screen.
• Units of measurement may denote the “metric” value or the “scientific” value.
For example, “k” for kilo may denote “1000” or “1024”, “M” for mega may
denote “1000000” or “1048576” and so on.
• “e.g.,” is a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” means “that is” or “in other
words”.
Document Conventions
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
6
Icons Used in Figures
Figures in this User’s Guide may use the following generic icons. The P-870HN-
51D icon is not an exact representation of your device.
P-870HN-51D Computer Notebook computer
Server DSLAM Firewall
Telephone Switch Router
Safety Warnings
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 7
Safety Warnings
• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming
pool.
• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do NOT store things on the device.
• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk
of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to
dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should
service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.
• Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in
North America or 230V AC in Europe).
• Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the
product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord.
• Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause
electrocution.
• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power
source.
• Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a
new one.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a
remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your
device.
• Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord.
• Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using
the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s).
• If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will
be damaged.
Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE
stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical
and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and
electronic equipment should be treated separately.
Safety Warnings
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
8
Contents Overview
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 9
Contents Overview
User’s Guide ...........................................................................................................................19
Introducing the P-870HN-51D ................................................................................................... 21
Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................... 27
Introducing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................. 47
Technical Reference ..............................................................................................................53
Status Screens .......................................................................................................................... 55
WAN Setup ................................................................................................................................ 69
LAN Setup ................................................................................................................................. 91
Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................................. 99
Network Address Translation (NAT) ........................................................................................ 129
Firewall .................................................................................................................................... 141
Certificate ................................................................................................................................ 147
Static Route ............................................................................................................................. 159
Policy Forwarding .................................................................................................................... 163
RIP ........................................................................................................................................... 167
Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................... 169
Dynamic DNS Setup ................................................................................................................ 189
Remote Management ..............................................................................................................191
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ............................................................................................. 197
Parental Control ....................................................................................................................... 209
Interface Group ........................................................................................................................ 213
System Settings ....................................................................................................................... 219
Logs ........................................................................................................................................ 223
Tools ........................................................................................................................................ 227
Diagnostic ................................................................................................................................ 235
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 239
Product Specifications ............................................................................................................. 247
Contents Overview
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
10
Table of Contents
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 11
Table of Contents
About This User's Guide..........................................................................................................3
Document Conventions............................................................................................................5
Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................7
Contents Overview ...................................................................................................................9
Table of Contents....................................................................................................................11
Part I: User’s Guide................................................................................ 19
Chapter 1
Introducing the P-870HN-51D ................................................................................................21
1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 21
1.2 P-870HN-51D for Internet Access ...................................................................................... 21
1.3 Ways to Manage the P-870HN-51D .................................................................................... 22
1.4 Good Habits for Managing the P-870HN-51D ..................................................................... 22
1.5 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................... 23
1.6 The RESET Button .............................................................................................................. 25
1.6.1 Using the Reset Button .............................................................................................. 25
1.7 The WPS Button .................................................................................................................. 25
1.7.1 Turn the Wireless LAN Off or On ............................................................................... 25
1.7.2 Activate WPS .............................................................................................................25
Chapter 2
Tutorials...................................................................................................................................27
2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 27
2.2 How to Set up a Wireless Network ...................................................................................... 27
2.2.1 Example Parameters .................................................................................................. 27
2.2.2 Configuring the AP ..................................................................................................... 28
2.2.3 Configuring the Wireless Client .................................................................................. 30
2.3 Configuring the MAC Address Filter .................................................................................... 36
2.4 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding ......................................................................................... 37
2.4.1 Port Forwarding ..........................................................................................................37
2.5 Access the P-870HN-51D Using DDNS .............................................................................. 38
2.5.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org .................................................... 39
2.5.2 Configuring DDNS on Your P-870HN-51D ................................................................. 39
Table of Contents
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
12
2.5.3 Testing the DDNS Setting .......................................................................................... 40
2.6 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network ................................................... 40
2.7 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup ........................................................................... 43
Chapter 3
Introducing the Web Configurator ........................................................................................47
3.1 Web Configurator Overview ................................................................................................. 47
3.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator ................................................................................ 47
3.2 Web Configurator Main Screen ........................................................................................... 48
3.2.1 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................ 49
3.2.2 Main Window ..............................................................................................................51
3.2.3 Status Bar ................................................................................................................... 51
Part II: Technical Reference.................................................................. 53
Chapter 4
Status Screens........................................................................................................................55
4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 55
4.2 Status Screen ...................................................................................................................... 55
4.2.1 WAN Service Statistics ............................................................................................... 58
4.2.2 Route Info ................................................................................................................... 60
4.2.3 WLAN Station List ...................................................................................................... 61
4.2.4 VDSL Statistics ........................................................................................................... 62
4.2.5 LAN Statistics ............................................................................................................. 66
4.2.6 Client List ................................................................................................................... 66
Chapter 5
WAN Setup...............................................................................................................................69
5.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 69
5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .............................................................................. 69
5.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................70
5.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................................. 71
5.4 The Layer 2 Interface Screen .............................................................................................. 71
5.4.1 Layer 2 Interface Configuration .................................................................................. 72
5.5 The Internet Connection Screen .......................................................................................... 73
5.5.1 WAN Connection Configuration ................................................................................. 74
5.6 Technical Reference ............................................................................................................ 84
Chapter 6
LAN Setup................................................................................................................................91
6.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 91
Table of Contents
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 13
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .............................................................................. 91
6.2 What You Need To Know ..................................................................................................... 92
6.3 The LAN IP Screen .............................................................................................................. 93
6.4 Technical Reference ............................................................................................................ 95
Chapter 7
Wireless LAN...........................................................................................................................99
7.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 99
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .............................................................................. 99
7.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................... 100
7.3 Before You Begin ............................................................................................................... 102
7.4 The General Screen ......................................................................................................... 102
7.4.1 No Security ............................................................................................................... 104
7.4.2 WEP Encryption ....................................................................................................... 106
7.4.3 WPA(2)-PSK ............................................................................................................ 107
7.4.4 WPA(2) Authentication ............................................................................................. 108
7.4.5 MAC Filter ............................................................................................................110
7.4.6 Adding a New MAC Filtering Rule ........................................................................111
7.5 The More AP Screen .........................................................................................................112
7.5.1 More AP Edit .............................................................................................................113
7.6 The WPS Screen ...............................................................................................................113
7.7 The WPS Station Screen ...................................................................................................115
7.8 The Advanced Setup Screen .............................................................................................116
7.9 Technical Reference ...........................................................................................................117
7.9.1 Wireless Network Overview ......................................................................................118
7.9.2 Additional Wireless Terms .........................................................................................119
7.9.3 Wireless Security Overview ......................................................................................119
7.9.4 WiFi Protected Setup ............................................................................................... 121
Chapter 8
Network Address Translation (NAT)....................................................................................129
8.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 129
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................ 129
8.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................... 129
8.3 The Port Forwarding Screen ............................................................................................. 130
8.3.1 The Port Forwarding Edit Screen ............................................................................ 132
8.4 The Trigger Port Screen ....................................................................................................133
8.4.1 Trigger Port Configuration ....................................................................................... 136
8.5 The DMZ Host Screen ....................................................................................................... 137
8.6 The ALG Screen ............................................................................................................... 138
8.7 Technical Reference .......................................................................................................... 138
Chapter 9
Firewall...................................................................................................................................141
Table of Contents
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
14
9.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 141
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................ 141
9.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................... 141
9.3 The Firewall Screen ........................................................................................................... 142
9.3.1 Creating Incoming Firewall Rules .......................................................................... 144
Chapter 10
Certificate ..............................................................................................................................147
10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 147
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 147
10.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 147
10.3 The Local Certificates Screen ......................................................................................... 148
10.3.1 Create Certificate Request .................................................................................... 149
10.3.2 Import Certificate ................................................................................................... 150
10.3.3 Certificate Details .................................................................................................. 152
10.3.4 Load Signed Certificate .......................................................................................... 153
10.4 The Trusted CA Screen ................................................................................................... 154
10.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate ................................................................................... 156
10.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate ................................................................................. 157
Chapter 11
Static Route...........................................................................................................................159
11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 159
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................... 159
11.2 The Static Route Screen .................................................................................................. 160
11.2.1 Static Route Edit ................................................................................................... 161
Chapter 12
Policy Forwarding.................................................................................................................163
12.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 163
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 163
12.2 The Static Route Screen .................................................................................................. 163
12.2.1 Policy Forwarding Setup ...................................................................................... 164
Chapter 13
RIP..........................................................................................................................................167
13.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 167
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 167
13.2 The RIP Screen ............................................................................................................... 167
Chapter 14
Quality of Service (QoS).......................................................................................................169
14.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 169
Table of Contents
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 15
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 169
14.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 170
14.3 The Quality of Service General Screen .......................................................................... 170
14.4 The Queue Setup Screen ................................................................................................ 172
14.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue ............................................................................................ 173
14.5 The Class Setup Screen ................................................................................................ 174
14.5.1 QoS Class Edit ...................................................................................................... 176
14.6 The Policer Setup Screen ............................................................................................ 180
14.6.1 Policer Setup Add/Edit ........................................................................................... 181
14.7 The QoS Monitor Screen ................................................................................................ 183
14.8 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................ 184
14.8.1 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment ................................................................... 185
14.8.2 Traffic Policing Meter Types ................................................................................... 186
Chapter 15
Dynamic DNS Setup .............................................................................................................189
15.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 189
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 189
15.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 189
15.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen .............................................................................................. 190
Chapter 16
Remote Management............................................................................................................191
16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 191
16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 191
16.2 The TR-069 Screen .........................................................................................................191
16.3 The TR-064 Screen .........................................................................................................193
16.4 The Service Control Screen ............................................................................................ 194
16.5 The IP Address Screen ................................................................................................... 195
16.5.1 Adding an IP Address ............................................................................................ 196
Chapter 17
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)..........................................................................................197
17.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 197
17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 197
17.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 197
17.3 The UPnP Screen ............................................................................................................ 198
17.4 Installing UPnP in Windows Example .............................................................................. 199
17.5 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ............................................................................. 202
Chapter 18
Parental Control....................................................................................................................209
18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 209
Table of Contents
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
16
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 209
18.2 The Time Restriction Screen ........................................................................................... 209
18.2.1 Adding a Schedule ................................................................................................. 210
18.3 The URL Filter Screen ......................................................................................................211
18.3.1 Adding URL Filter ................................................................................................... 212
Chapter 19
Interface Group .....................................................................................................................213
19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 213
19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 213
19.2 The Interface Group Screen ............................................................................................ 213
19.2.1 Interface Group Configuration ................................................................................ 215
19.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria ..................................................................................... 216
Chapter 20
System Settings....................................................................................................................219
20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 219
20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 219
20.2 The General Screen ........................................................................................................219
20.3 The Time Setting Screen ................................................................................................ 220
Chapter 21
Logs ......................................................................................................................................223
21.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 223
21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 223
21.2 The View Log Screen ...................................................................................................... 223
21.3 The Log Settings Screen ................................................................................................. 224
Chapter 22
Tools.......................................................................................................................................227
22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 227
22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 227
22.2 The Firmware Screen ...................................................................................................... 228
22.3 The Configuration Screen ................................................................................................ 230
22.4 The Restart Screen ......................................................................................................... 232
Chapter 23
Diagnostic..............................................................................................................................235
23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 235
23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................... 235
23.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 235
23.3 The General Diagnostic Screen ...................................................................................... 236
23.4 The 802.1ag Screen ........................................................................................................237
Table of Contents
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 17
Chapter 24
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................239
24.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ...................................................................... 239
24.2 P-870HN-51D Access and Login ..................................................................................... 240
24.3 Internet Access ................................................................................................................ 242
24.4 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 244
Chapter 25
Product Specifications.........................................................................................................247
25.1 Hardware Specifications .................................................................................................. 247
25.2 Firmware Specifications ...................................................................................................247
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting ..................................................................................253
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address...........................................................269
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions......................................299
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting ...........................................................................309
Appendix E Wireless LANs ..................................................................................................321
Appendix F Common Services.............................................................................................337
Appendix G Open Software Announcements.......................................................................341
Appendix H Legal Information..............................................................................................355
Index.......................................................................................................................................359
Table of Contents
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
18
19
PART I
User’s Guide
20
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 21
CHAPTER 1
Introducing the P-870HN-51D
1.1 Overview
The P-870HN-51D is a VDSL2 device that allows super-fast, secure Internet
access. It extends the range of your existing wired network without additional
wiring, providing easy network access to mobile users. You can set up a wireless
network with other IEEE 802.11b/g/n compatible devices. A range of services such
as a firewall and content filtering are also available for secure Internet computing.
The P-870HN-51D supports Quality of Service (QoS) to efficiently manage traffic
on your network by giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular
computers.
Please refer to the following description of the product name format.
• “H” denotes an integrated 4-port hub (switch).
• “N” denotes IEEE 802.11n wireless functionality. There is an embedded mini-PCI
module for IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN connectivity.
Only use firmware for your P-870HN-51D’s specific model. Refer to
the label on the bottom of your P-870HN-51D.
Models ending in “1”, for example P-870HN-51D, denote a device that works over
the analog telephone system, POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service).
See Chapter 25 on page 247 for a full list of features.
1.2 P-870HN-51D for Internet Access
Your P-870HN-51D provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to
the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. You can have up to
seven WAN services over one VDSL WAN line.
Chapter 1 Introducing the P-870HN-51D
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
22
Computers can connect to the P-870HN-51D’s LAN ports (or wirelessly).
Figure 1 P-870HN-51D’s Internet Access Application
You can also configure the firewall on the P-870HN-51D for secure Internet
access. When the firewall is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your
network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from your network. This means
that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely
browse the Internet and download files.
1.3 Ways to Manage the P-870HN-51D
Use any of the following methods to manage the P-870HN-51D.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the P-
870HN-51D using a (supported) web browser.
• TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your
device.
1.4 Good Habits for Managing the P-870HN-51D
Do the following things regularly to make the P-870HN-51D more secure and to
manage the P-870HN-51D more effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists
of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
VDSL
LAN
PPPoE
IPoE
Bridging
WAN
WLAN
Chapter 1 Introducing the P-870HN-51D
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 23
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it).
Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes
unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the
P-870HN-51D to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier
configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the P-870HN-51D.
You could simply restore your last configuration.
1.5 LEDs (Lights)
The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs.
Figure 2 LEDs on the Device
Chapter 1 Introducing the P-870HN-51D
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
24
None of the LEDs are on if the P-870HN-51D is not receiving power.
Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware connections.
Table 1 LED Descriptions
LED COLO
RSTATUS DESCRIPTION
PWR/SYS Green On The P-870HN-51D is receiving power and ready for use.
Blinking The P-870HN-51D is self-testing.
Red On The P-870HN-51D detected an error while self-testing, or
there is a device malfunction.
Off The P-870HN-51D is not receiving power.
ETHERNET
1-4 Green On The P-870HN-51D has a successful 10 Mbps Ethernet
connection with a device on the Local Area Network
(LAN).
Blinking The P-870HN-51D is sending or receiving data to/from
the LAN at 10 Mbps.
Orange On The P-870HN-51D has a successful 100 Mbps Ethernet
connection with a device on the Local Area Network
(LAN).
Blinking The P-870HN-51D is sending or receiving data to/from
the LAN at 100 Mbps.
Off The P-870HN-51D does not have an Ethernet connection
with the LAN.
WLAN/
WPS Green On The wireless network is activated and is operating in IEEE
802.11b/g/n mode.
Blinking The P-870HN-51D is communicating with other wireless
clients at 2 Hz/s.
Orange Blinking The P-870HN-51D is setting up a WPS connection.
Off The wireless network is not activated.
DSL Green On The VDSL line is up.
Blinking The P-870HN-51D is initializing the VDSL line.
Off The DSL line is down.
INTERNET Green On The P-870HN-51D has an IP connection but no traffic.
Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or
assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was
successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection
is up.
Blinking The P-870HN-51D is sending or receiving IP traffic.
Red On The P-870HN-51D attempted to make an IP connection
but failed. Possible causes are no response from a DHCP
server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE authentication failed.
Off The P-870HN-51D does not have an IP connection.
Chapter 1 Introducing the P-870HN-51D
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 25
1.6 The RESET Button
If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need
to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default
configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had
previously and the password will be reset to “1234”.
1.6.1 Using the Reset Button
1Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking).
2To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for
ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the
POWER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device
restarts.
1.7 The WPS Button
You can use the WPS button on the rear panel of the device to turn the wireless
LAN off or on. You can also use it to activate WPS in order to quickly set up a
wireless network with strong security. Refer to Section 7.9.4 on page 121 for more
information on WPS.
1.7.1 Turn the Wireless LAN Off or On
1Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking).
2Press the WPS button for one second and release it. The WLAN/WPS LED should
change from on to off or vice versa.
1.7.2 Activate WPS
1Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking).
2Select Active Wireless LAN and configure the SSID and security settings in the
Network > Wireless LAN screen. Click Apply then.
3Make sure the WLAN LED is on.
Chapter 1 Introducing the P-870HN-51D
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
26
4Press the WPS button for more than five seconds and release it. Press the WPS
button on another WPS -enabled device within range of the P-870HN-51D. The
WLAN/WPS LED should flash while the P-870HN-51D sets up a WPS connection
with the wireless device.
Note: You must activate WPS in the P-870HN-51D and in another wireless device
within two minutes of each other. See Section 7.9.4 on page 121 for more
information.
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 27
CHAPTER 2
Tutorials
2.1 Overview
This chapter describes:
•How to Set up a Wireless Network on page 27.
•Configuring the MAC Address Filter on page 36.
•Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding on page 37.
•Access the P-870HN-51D Using DDNS on page 38.
•Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network on page 40.
•Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup on page 43.
Note: The tutorials featured in this chapter require a basic understanding of
connecting to and using the Web Configurator on your P-870HN-51D. For
details, see the included Quick Start Guide. For field descriptions of individual
screens, see the related technical reference in this User's Guide.
2.2 How to Set up a Wireless Network
This tutorial gives you examples of how to set up an access point and wireless
client for wireless communication using the following parameters. The wireless
clients can access the Internet through an AP wirelessly.
2.2.1 Example Parameters
An access point (AP) or wireless router is referred to as “AP” and a computer with
a wireless network card or USB/PCI adapter is referred to as “wireless client” here.
SSID SSID_Example3
Security WPA-PSK
(Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey)
802.11 mode IEEE 802.11b/g/n Mixed
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
28
We use the P-870HN-51D web screens and M-302 utility screens as an example.
The screens may vary slightly for different models.
2.2.2 Configuring the AP
Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your AP.
1Open the Network > Wireless LAN screen in the AP’s web configurator.
Figure 3 AP: Wireless LAN
2Make sure the Active Wireless LAN check box is selected.
3Enter “SSID_Example3” as the SSID and select Auto to have the P-870HN-51D
automatically determine a channel which is not used by another AP.
4Set security mode to WPA-PSK and enter “ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey” in
the Pre-Shared Key field. Click Apply.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 29
5Click the Advanced Setup tab and select 802.11b/g/n Mixed in the 802.11
Mode field. Click Apply.
Figure 4 AP: Wireless LAN > Advanced Setup
6Open the Status screen.Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under
Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface
Status.
Figure 5 AP: Status
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
30
7Click the WLAN Station List hyperlink in the AP’s Status screen. You can see if
any wireless client has connected to the AP.
Figure 6 AP: Status: WLAN Station List
2.2.3 Configuring the Wireless Client
This section describes how to connect the wireless client to a network.
2.2.3.1 Connecting to a Wireless LAN
The following sections show you how to join a wireless network using the ZyXEL
utility, as in the following diagram. The wireless client is labeled C and the access
point is labeled AP.
There are three ways to connect the client to an access point.
• Configure nothing and leave the wireless client to automatically scan for and
connect to any available network that has no wireless security configured.
• Manually connect to a network.
• Configure a profile to have the wireless client automatically connect to a specific
network or peer computer.
This example illustrates how to manually connect your wireless client to an access
point (AP) which is configured for WPA-PSK security and connected to the
Internet. Before you connect to the access point, you must know its Service Set
IDentity (SSID) and WPA-PSK pre-shared key. In this example, the SSID is
“SSID_Example3” and the pre-shared key is “ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey”.
After you install the ZyXEL utility and then insert the wireless client, follow the
steps below to connect to a network using the Site Survey screen.
CAP
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 31
1Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Site Survey tab to open the screen shown
next.
Figure 7 ZyXEL Utility: Site Survey
2The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks. Click
Scan if you want to search again. If no entry displays in the Available Network
List, that means there is no wireless network available within range. Make sure
the AP or peer computer is turned on or move the wireless client closer to the AP
or peer computer.
3When you try to connect to an AP with security configured, a window will pop up
prompting you to specify the security settings. Enter the pre-shared key and leave
the encryption type at the default setting.
Use the Next button to move on to the next screen. You can use the Back button
at any time to return to the previous screen, or the Exit button to return to the
Site Survey screen.
Figure 8 ZyXEL Utility: Security Settings
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
32
4The Confirm Save window appears. Check your settings and click Save to
continue.
Figure 9 ZyXEL Utility: Confirm Save
5The ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the wireless
network using your settings. When the wireless link is established, the ZyXEL
utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays
details of the active connection. Check the network information in the Link Info
screen to verify that you have successfully connected to the selected network. If
the wireless client is not connected to a network, the fields in this screen remain
blank.
Figure 10 ZyXEL Utility: Link Info
6Open your Internet browser and enter http://www.zyxel.com or the URL of any
other web site in the address bar. If you are able to access the web site, your
wireless connection is successfully configured.
If you cannot access the web site, try changing the encryption type in the
Security Settings screen, check the Troubleshooting section of this User's Guide
or contact your network administrator.
2.2.3.2 Creating and Using a Profile
A profile lets you automatically connect to the same wireless network every time
you use the wireless client. You can also configure different profiles for different
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 33
networks, for example if you connect a notebook computer to wireless networks at
home and at work.
This example illustrates how to set up a profile and connect the wireless client to
an access point configured for WPA-PSK security. In this example, the SSID is
“SSID_Example3”, the profile name is “PN_Example3” and the pre-shared key is
“ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey”. You have chosen the profile name
“PN_Example3”.
1Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Profile tab to open the screen shown next.
Click Add to configure a new profile.
Figure 11 ZyXEL Utility: Profile
2The Add New Profile screen appears. The wireless client automatically searches
for available wireless networks, which are displayed in the Scan Info box. Click
on Scan if you want to search again. You can also configure your profile for a
wireless network that is not in the list.
Figure 12 ZyXEL Utility: Add New Profile
3Give the profile a descriptive name (of up to 32 printable ASCII characters). Select
Infrastructure and either manually enter or select the AP's SSID in the Scan
Info table and click Select.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
34
4Choose the same encryption method as the AP to which you want to connect (In
this example, WPA-PSK).
Figure 13 ZyXEL Utility: Profile Security
5This screen varies depending on the encryption method you selected in the
previous screen. Enter the pre-shared key and leave the encryption type at the
default setting.
Figure 14 ZyXEL Utility: Profile Encryption
6In the next screen, leave both boxes checked.
Figure 15 Profile: Wireless Protocol Settings.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 35
7Verify the profile settings in the read-only screen. Click Save to save and go to the
next screen.
Figure 16 Profile: Confirm Save
8Click Activate Now to use the new profile immediately. Otherwise, click the
Activate Later button.
If you clicked Activate Later, you can select the profile from the list in the Profile
screen and click Connect to activate it.
Note: Only one profile can be activated and used at any given time.
Figure 17 Profile: Activate
9When you activate the new profile, the ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info
screen while it connects to the AP using your settings. When the wireless link is
established, the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link
Info screen displays details of the active connection.
10 Open your Internet browser, enter http://www.zyxel.com or the URL of any other
web site in the address bar and press ENTER. If you are able to access the web
site, your new profile is successfully configured.
11 If you cannot access the Internet go back to the Profile screen, select the profile
you are using and click Edit. Check the details you entered previously. Also, refer
to the Troubleshooting section of this User's Guide or contact your network
administrator if necessary.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
36
2.3 Configuring the MAC Address Filter
Thomas noticed that his daughter Josephine spends too much time surfing the
web and downloading media files. He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing
the Internet so that she can concentrate on preparing for her final exams.
Josephine’s computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the P-870HN-
51D. Thomas decides to use the Security > MAC Filter screen to grant wireless
network access to his computer but not to Josephine’s computer.
1Click Status > Client List to open the following screen. Look for the MAC address
of Thomas’ computer.
2Click Security > MAC Filter to open the MAC Filter screen. Select Active. Enter
the MAC address you found in the Client List screen. Click Apply.
Thomas
Josephine
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 37
Thomas can also grant access to the computers of other members of his family
and friends. However, Josephine and others not listed in this screen will no longer
be able to access the Internet through the P-870HN-51D.
2.4 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding
Thomas recently received an Xbox 360 as his birthday gift. His friends invited him
to play online games with them on Xbox LIVE. In order to communicate and play
with other gamers on Xbox LIVE, Thomas needs to configure the port settings on
his P-870HN-51D.
Xbox 360 requires the following ports to be available in order to operate Xbox
LIVE correctly:
TCP: 53, 80, 3074
UDP: 53, 88, 3074
Thomas can configure the port settings for Xbox 360.
2.4.1 Port Forwarding
Configure the ports for Xbox 360 by doing the following.
1Click Network > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen. Select
User define from the Service Name field.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
38
2Configure the screen as follows to open TCP/UDP port 53 for Xbox 360. Click
Apply.
3Repeat steps 2 and 3 to open the rest of the ports for Xbox 360. Use a different
service name for each port you want to add The port forwarding settings you
configured are listed in the Port Forwarding screen.
Thomas can then connect his Xbox 360 to the Internet and play online games with
his friends.
2.5 Access the P-870HN-51D Using DDNS
If you connect your P-870HN-51D to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP
address, it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet. The P-
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 39
870HN-51D’s WAN IP address changes dynamically. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows
you to access the P-870HN-51D using a domain name.
To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org.
This tutorial shows you how to:
•Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
•Configuring DDNS on Your P-870HN-51D
•Testing the DDNS Setting
Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS.
2.5.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
1Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org.
2Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the
username and password.
3Log into www.dyndns.org using your account.
4Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an
example.
• Hostname: zyxelrouter.dyndns.org
•Service Type: Host with IP address
• IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your P-870HN-51D is currently
using. You can find the IP address on the P-870HN-51D’s Web Configurator
Status page.
Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the P-870HN-
51D later.
2.5.2 Configuring DDNS on Your P-870HN-51D
1Log into the P-870HN-51D's advanced mode.
w.x.y.z a.b.c.d
http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org
A
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
40
2Configure the following settings in the Advanced > Dynamic DNS screen.
2a Select WWW.DynDNS.ORG for the Service Provider.
2b Type zyxelrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field.
2c Select interface for which the DDNS applies.
2d Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345).
2e Click Apply.
2.5.3 Testing the DDNS Setting
Now you should be able to access the P-870HN-51D from the Internet. To test
this:
1Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is
connected to the Internet.
2Type http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter].
3The P-870HN-51D’s login page should appear. You can then log into the P-870HN-
51D and manage it.
2.6 Configuring Static Route for Routing to
Another Network
In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may
connect a router to the P-870HN-51D’s LAN. The router may be used to separate
two department networks. This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing
rule for two network routings.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 41
In the following figure, router R is connected to the P-870HN-51D’s LAN. R
connects to two networks, N1 (192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If
you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1 network) to computer B (in N2
network), the traffic is sent to the P-870HN-51D’s WAN default gateway by
default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic.
You need to specify a static routing rule on the P-870HN-51D to specify R as the
router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the P-870HN-51D routes
traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B.
N2
B
N1
A
R
N2
B
N1
A
R
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
42
This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:
To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:
1Log into the P-870HN-51D’s Web Configurator in advanced mode.
2Click Advanced > Static Route.
3Click Add to add a new rule in the Static Route screen.
4Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:
4a Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination
(N2).
4b Select the WAN interface to which the rule applies. This example uses the
default WAN interface.
4c Select Gateway Address and type 192.168.1.253 (R’s N1 address) in the
Gateway IP Address field.
4a Click Apply.
Table 2 IP Settings in this Tutorial
DEVICE / COMPUTER IP ADDRESS
The P-870HN-51D’s WAN 172.16.1.1
The P-870HN-51D’s LAN 192.168.1.1
A192.168.1.34
R’s N1 192.168.1.253
R’s N2 192.168.10.2
B192.168.10.33
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 43
Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally
configure B’s firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through.
2.7 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup
This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen.
Let’s say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to
prioritize e-mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to
clients at least twice every hour. You also upload data files (such as logs and e-
mail archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your colleagues use the
Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other
branch offices.
In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission
bandwidth of 10,000 kbps. For this example, you want to configure QoS so that e-
mail traffic gets the highest priority with at least 5,000 kbps. You can do the
following:
• Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (7) to e-mail traffic from
the LAN interface, so that e-mail traffic would not get delayed when there is
network congestion.
• Note the IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) and/or MAC address
(AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for example) of your computer and map it to queue 7.
Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the P-870HN-51D.
Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the
internal QoS mapping table on the P-870HN-51D.
QoS Exampl e
10,000 kbps
DSL
Your computer
IP=192.168.1.23
A colleague’s computer
Other traffic: Automatic classifier
and/or
MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF
Email traffic: Highest priority
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
44
1Click Advanced > QoS > General and check Active. Set your WAN Managed
Upstream Bandwidth to 10,000 kbps (or leave this blank to have the P-870HN-
51D automatically determine this figure).
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS
2Go to Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup. Click Add to create a new queue. In
the screen that opens, check Active and enter or select the following values:
•Name: E-mail
•Interface: LAN/WLAN
•Priority: 4 (High)
•Weight: 8
•Rate Limit: 5,000 (kbps)
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 45
3Go to Advanced > QoS > Class Setup. Click Add to create a new class. Check
Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup
Class Name Give a class name to this traffic, such as E-mail in
this example.
To Queue Link this to an item in the Advanced > QoS >
Queue Setup screen, which is the E-mail queue
created in this example.
From Interface This is the interface from which the traffic will be
coming from. Select Local.
Ether Type Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP
address or MAC address.
Chapter 2 Tutorials
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
46
This maps e-mail traffic coming from port 25 to the highest priority, which you
have created in the previous screen (see the IP Protocol field). This also maps
your computer’s IP address and MAC address to the E-mail queue (see the
Source fields).
4Verify that the queue setup works by checking Advanced > QoS > Monitor. This
shows the bandwidth alloted to e-mail traffic compared to other network traffic.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Monitor
MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer -
AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the MAC Mask if you
know it.
IP Address Type the IP address of your computer -
192.168.1.23. Type the IP Subnet Mask if you
know it.
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 47
CHAPTER 3
Introducing the Web
Configurator
3.1 Web Configurator Overview
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy
device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and
later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3.6 and later versions. The recommended screen
resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled
by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
See Appendix C on page 299 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed
in Internet Explorer.
3.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator
1Make sure your P-870HN-51D hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick
Start Guide).
2Launch your web browser.
3Type "https://192.168.1.1" as the URL.
Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
48
4A password screen displays. Enter the default admin user name admin and
default admin password 1234. The password displays in non-readable characters.
If you have changed the password, enter your password and click OK. Click
Cancel to revert to the default password in the password field.
Figure 18 Password Screen
3.2 Web Configurator Main Screen
Figure 19 Main Screen
A
B
C
Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 49
As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:
•A - navigation panel
•B - main window
•C - status bar
3.2.1 Navigation Panel
Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure P-
870HN-51D features. The following tables describe each menu item.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Status This screen shows the P-870HN-51D’s general device and network
status information. Use this screen to access the statistics and
client list.
Network
WAN Layer 2
Interface Use this screen to add or remove a DSL PTM (Packet Transfer
Mode) interface.
Internet
Connection Use this screen to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address
assignment, and other advanced properties.
LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP, DHCP and IP alias
settings.
Wireless LAN General Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings, WLAN
authentication/security settings and MAC filtering rules.
More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the P-870HN-51D.
WPS Use this screen to enable WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) and view
the WPS status.
WPS Station Use this screen to use WPS to set up your wireless network.
Advanced
Setup Use this screen to configure the advanced wireless LAN settings.
NAT Port
Forwarding The NAT screens are available only when you enable NAT in a
WAN connection.
Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside
world.
Trigger Port Use this screen to change your P-870HN-51D’s port triggering
settings.
DMZ Host Use this screen to configure a default server which receives
packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding
screen.
ALG Use this screen to allow SIP sessions to pass through the P-
870HN-51D.
Security
Firewall Incoming This screen shows a summary of the IP filtering rules, and allows
you to add or remove an incoming IP filtering rule that allows
incoming traffic from the WAN.
Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
50
Certificate Local
Certificates Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage
certificates and certification requests.
Trusted CA Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs.
Advanced
Static Route IP Static Route Use this screen to configure IP static routes to tell your device
about networks beyond the directly connected remote nodes.
Policy
Forwarding Use this screen to configure policy routing on the P-870HN-51D.
RIP Use this screen to configure RIP (Routing Information Protocol)
settings.
QoS General Use this screen to enable QoS.
Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queues.
Class Setup Use this screen to define a classifier.
Policer Setup Use this screen to specify the committed rate and committed
burst size for incoming packets.
Monitor Use this screen to view QoS packets statistics.
Dynamic DNS This screen allows you to use a static hostname alias for a
dynamic IP address.
Remote
MGMT TR069 Use this screen to configure the P-870HN-51D to be managed by
an ACS (Auto Configuration Server).
TR064 Use this screen to enable management via TR-064 on the LAN.
ServiceControl Use this screen to configure which services/protocols can access
which P-870HN-51D interface.
IP Address Use this screen to configure from which IP address(es) users can
manage the P-870HN-51D.
UPnP General Use this screen to turn UPnP on or off.
Parental
Control Time
Restriction Use this screen to configure the days and times when the
restrictions are enforced.
URL Filter Use this screen to prevent users of your netowrk from viewing
inappropriate web content.
Interface
Group Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group.
Maintenance
System General Use this screen to configure your device’s name, domain name,
management inactivity timeout and password.
Time Setting Use this screen to change your P-870HN-51D’s time and date.
Logs View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the level that you selected.
Log Settings Use this screen to change your P-870HN-51D’s log settings.
Tools Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your device.
Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore your device’s configuration
(settings) or reset the factory default settings.
Restart This screen allows you to reboot the P-870HN-51D without
turning the power off.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 51
3.2.2 Main Window
The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in
the rest of this document.
Right after you log in, the Status screen is displayed. See Chapter 4 on page 55
for more information about the Status screen.
3.2.3 Status Bar
Check the status bar when you click Apply or OK to verify that the configuration
has been updated.
Diagnostic General Use this screen to test the connections to other devices.
802.1ag Use this screen to configure CFM (Connectivity Fault
Management) MD (maintenance domain) and MA (maintenance
association), perform connectivity tests and view test reports.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
52
53
PART II
Technical Reference
54
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 55
CHAPTER 4
Status Screens
4.1 Overview
Use the Status screens to look at the current status of the device, system
resources and interfaces (LAN, WAN and WLAN). The Status screen also provides
detailed information from DHCP and statistics from traffic.
4.2 Status Screen
Click Status to open this screen.
Figure 20 Status Screen
Chapter 4 Status Screens
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
56
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 4 Status Screen
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Enter how often you want the P-870HN-51D to update this screen.
Apply Click this to update this screen immediately.
Device
Information
User Name This field displays the P-870HN-51D system name. It is used for
identification. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.
Model
Number This is the model name of your device.
MAC
Address This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to
your P-870HN-51D.
Firmware
Version This field displays the current version of the firmware inside the device.
It also shows the date the firmware version was created. Click this to go
to the screen where you can change it.
DSL
Firmware
Version
This field displays the current version of the device’s DSL modem code.
WAN
Information
Mode This is the method of encapsulation used by your ISP.
IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the P-870HN-51D in the
WAN.
IP Subnet
Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN.
LAN
Information
IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the P-870HN-51D in the
LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.
IP Subnet
Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN.
DHCP This field displays what DHCP services the P-870HN-51D is providing to
the LAN. Choices are:
Server - The P-870HN-51D is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP
addresses to other computers in the LAN.
Relay - The P-870HN-51D acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays
DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the
clients.
None - The P-870HN-51D is not providing any DHCP services to the
LAN.
Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.
WLAN
Information
Channel This is the channel number used by the P-870HN-51D now.
Chapter 4 Status Screens
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 57
WPS Status This field displays the status of WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). Click this
to go to the screen where you can change it.
AP Information
ESSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the P-870HN-51D in this
wireless network. Click this to go to the screen where you can change
it.
Status This shows the current status of the wireless network.
Security This shows the level of wireless security the P-870HN-51D is using in
this wireless network.
System Status
System
Uptime This field displays how long the P-870HN-51D has been running since it
last started up. The P-870HN-51D starts up when you plug it in, when
you restart it (Maintenance > Tools > Restart), or when you reset it
(see Section 1.6 on page 25).
Current
Date/Time This field displays the current date and time in the P-870HN-51D. You
can change this in Maintenance > System > Time Setting.
System
Mode This displays whether the P-870HN-51D is functioning as a router or a
bridge.
CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the P-870HN-51D’s processing
ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the P-
870HN-51D is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to
improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more
throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using
QoS; see Chapter 14 on page 169).
Memory
Usage This field displays what percentage of the P-870HN-51D’s memory is
currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If
memory usage does get close to 100%, the P-870HN-51D is probably
becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See Section 22.4
on page 232, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few
seconds.
Interface Status
Interface This column displays each interface the P-870HN-51D has.
Status This field indicates whether or not the P-870HN-51D is using the
interface.
For the DSL interface, this field displays LinkDown (line is down) or Up
(line is up or connected).
For the LAN or Ethernet WAN interface, this field displays Up when the
P-870HN-51D is using the interface and NoLink when the line is
disconnected.
For the WLAN interface, it displays Up when WLAN is enabled or
Disabled when WLAN is not active.
Table 4 Status Screen
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 Status Screens
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
58
4.2.1 WAN Service Statistics
Click Status > WLAN Service Statistics to access this screen. Use this screen to
view the WAN statistics.
Figure 21 Status > WAN Service Statistics
Rate For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream
transmission rate.
For the LAN or Ethernet WAN interface, this displays the port speed and
duplex setting.
For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate.
More Status
WAN Service
Statistics Click this link to view packet specific statistics of the WAN
connection(s). See Section 4.2.1 on page 58.
Route Info Click this link to view the internal routing table on the P-870HN-51D.
See Section 4.2.2 on page 60.
WLAN
Station List Click this link to display the MAC address(es) of the wireless stations
that are currently associating with the P-870HN-51D. See Section 4.2.3
on page 61.
VDSL
Statistics Click this to check the VDSL status and detailed performance data.
LAN
Statistics Click this link to view packet specific statistics on the LAN and WLAN
interfaces. See Section 4.2.5 on page 66.
Client List Click this link to view current DHCP client information. See Section
4.2.6 on page 66.
Table 4 Status Screen
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 Status Screens
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 59
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 5 Status > WAN Service Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface This shows the name of the WAN interface used by this connection.
A default name ipoa0, pppoa1, atmx (where x starts from 0 and is the
index number of ATM layer-2 interfaces using different VPI and/or VCI
values) or ptm0 indicates the DSL port. The pppx name (where x starts
from 0 and is the index number of PPP connection on the P-870HN-51D)
indicates a PPP connection via any one of the WAN interface. eth4
indicates the Ethernet WAN interface (the physical Ethernet WAN port).
The number after the dot (.) represents the VLAN ID number assigned to
traffic sent through this connection. The number after the underscore
(_) represents the index number of connections through the same
interface.
(null) means the entry is not valid.
Description This shows the descriptive name of this connection.
0 and 35 or 0 and 1 are the default VPI and VCI numbers. The last
number represents the index number of connections over the same PVC
or the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection.
(null) means the entry is not valid.
Received
Bytes This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface.
Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this
interface.
Drops This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
Transmitted
Bytes This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface.
Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this
interface.
Drops This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Refresh
Interval Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field.
Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the
Refresh Interval field.
Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics.
Chapter 4 Status Screens
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
60
4.2.2 Route Info
Routing is based on the destination address only and the P-870HN-51D takes the
shortest path to forward a packet. Click Status > Route Info to access this
screen. Use this screen to view the internal routing table on the P-870HN-51D.
Figure 22 Status > Route Info
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 6 Status > Route Info
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Destination This indicates the destination IP address of this route.
Gateway This indicates the IP address of the gateway that helps forward this route’s
traffic.
Subnet
Mask This indicates the destination subnet mask of this route.
Flag This indicates the route status.
Up: The route is up.
!(Reject): The route is blocked and will force a route lookup to fail.
Gateway: The route uses a gateway to forward traffic.
Host: The target of the route is a host.
Reinstate: The route is reinstated for dynamic routing.
Dynamic (redirect): The route is dynamically installed by a routing daemon
or redirect
Modified (redirect): The route is modified from a routing daemon or
rederict.
Metric The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the
best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". The
smaller the number, the lower the "cost".
Chapter 4 Status Screens
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 61
4.2.3 WLAN Station List
Click Status > WLAN Station List to access this screen. Use this screen to view
the wireless stations that are currently associated to the P-870HN-51D.
Figure 23 Status > WLAN Station List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Service This indicates the name of the service used to forward the route.
Interface This indicates the name of the interface through which the route is
forwarded.
•br0 indicates the LAN interface.
•ptm0 indicates the VDSL WAN interface using IPoE or in bridge mode.
•pppoa1 indicates the ADSL WAN interface using PPPoA.
•ipoa0 indicates the ADSL WAN interface using IPoA.
•ppp0 indicates the WAN interface using PPPoE.
•eth4 indicates the Ethernet WAN interface using IPoE.
Table 6 Status > Route Info (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 7 Status > WLAN Station List
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MAC This field shows the MAC (Media Access Control) address of an associated
wireless station.
SSID This field shows the SSID to which the wireless station is connected.
Interface This field shows the wireless interface to which the wireless station is
connected.
Refresh
Interval Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field.
Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh
Interval field.
Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics.
Chapter 4 Status Screens
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
62
4.2.4 VDSL Statistics
Click Status > VDSL Statistics to open the following screen. Use this screen to
check VDSL status and detailed performance data.
Figure 24 Status > VDSL Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 Status > VDSL Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VDSL Training
Status This shows whether the DSL port is connected (Showtime); idle (Idle);
not connected; is negotiating a connection with a COE device (G.994
Training); is under loop test (RUN_LD_INIT); or under channel
analysis(G.922 Channel Analysis).
VDSL Profile This shows the name of the VDSL profile which is applied to the VDSL
port to which the P-870HN-51D is connected.
Traffic Type This indicates whether the PTM interface is active (PTM Mode) or
inactive (Inactive).
Chapter 4 Status Screens
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 63
VDSL Port Details
These are the maximum Upstream and Downstream transfer rates for the ports that
belong to this profile. Upstream traffic refers to traffic from the P-870HN-51D to the
Central Organization Equipment (COE). Downstream traffic refers to traffic from the COE
to the P-870HN-51D.
Line Rate This indicates the maximum upstream/downstream net data rate
currently attainable on this line.
Actual Net Line
Rate This indicates the actual upstream/downstream data transmission rate.
Trellis Coding Trellis coding is a modulation scheme which allows highly efficient
transmission of information over band-limited channels such as
telephone lines. N/A means Trellis coding is disabled or not used on the
P-870HN-51D.
SNR Margin This indicates the upstream/downstream SNR margin.
Actual Delay This indicates the actual upstream/downstream transmission delay (in
milliseconds).
Transmit
Power This indicates the upstream/downstream transmission power of the line.
Receive Power This indicates the upstream/downstream receiving power of the line.
Actual INP This indicates the actual impulse noise protection (INP).
Total
Attenuation This indicates the upstream/downstream attenuation.
Attainable Net
Data Rate This indicates the maximum upstream/downstream net data rate
currently attainable on this line.
VDSL Band
Status The fields in this section indicate the status for upstream bands 0, 1, 2, 3
(U0, U1, U2, U3) and downstream bands 1, 2, 3 (D1, D2, D3).
Line
Attenuation This indicates the line attenuation status for each upstream and
downstream band. NA displays when the band is not used.
Signal
Attenuation This indicates the signal attenuation status for each upstream and
downstream band. NA displays when the band is not used.
SNR Margin This indicates the signal to noise ratio for each upstream and
downstream band. NA displays when the band is not used.
Transmit
Power This indicates the line transmission power for each upstream and
downstream band. NA displays when the band is not used.
Since Link time This indicates VDSL performance information recorded since the
connection is up.
FEC This indicates the number of Forward Error Correction Seconds (FECs)
failures since the last reset.
CRC This indicates the number of CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check) error(s)
since the last reset.
ES This indicates the number of port endpoint errored seconds (ESs) since
the last reset.
SES This indicates the number of port endpoint severely errored seconds
(SESs) since the last reset.
Table 8 Status > VDSL Statistics (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 Status Screens
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
64
UAS This indicates the number of UnAvailable Seconds (UAS) since the last
reset.
LOS This indicates the number of Loss of Signal (LOS) failures since the last
reset.
LOF This indicates the number of Loss of Framing (LOF) failures since the last
reset.
Latest 15
minutes time This indicates VDSL performance information recorded since the last 15
minute time segment.
FEC This indicates the number of Forward Error Correction Seconds (FECs)
failures since the last 15 minute time segment.
CRC This indicates the number of CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check) error(s)
since the last 15 minute time segment.
ES This indicates the number of port endpoint errored seconds (ESs) since
the last 15 minute time segment.
SES This indicates the number of port endpoint severely errored seconds
(SESs) since the last 15 minute time segment.
UAS This indicates the number of UnAvailable Seconds (UAS) since the last
15 minute time segment.
LOS This indicates the number of Loss of Signal (LOS) failures since the last
15 minute time segment.
LOF This indicates the number of Loss of Framing (LOF) failures since the last
15 minute time segment.
Previous 15
minutes time This indicates VDSL performance information recorded within the last 15
minute time segment.
FEC This indicates the number of Forward Error Correction Seconds (FECs)
failures within the last 15 minute time segment.
CRC This indicates the number of CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check) error(s)
within the last 15 minute time segment.
ES This indicates the number of port endpoint errored seconds (ESs) within
the last 15 minute time segment.
SES This indicates the number of port endpoint severely errored seconds
(SESs) within the last 15 minute time segment.
UAS This indicates the number of UnAvailable Seconds (UAS) within the last
15 minute time segment.
LOS This indicates the number of Loss of Signal (LOS) failures within the last
15 minute time segment.
LOF This indicates the number of Loss of Framing (LOF) failures within the
last 15 minute time segment.
Latest 1 day
time This indicates VDSL performance information recorded since the last 1-
day period.
FEC This indicates the number of Forward Error Correction Seconds (FECs)
failures since the last 1-day period.
CRC This indicates the number of CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check) error(s)
since the last 1-day period.
Table 8 Status > VDSL Statistics (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 Status Screens
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 65
ES This indicates the number of port endpoint errored seconds (ESs) since
the last 1-day period.
SES This indicates the number of port endpoint severely errored seconds
(SESs) since the last 1-day period.
UAS This indicates the number of UnAvailable Seconds (UAS) since the last 1-
day period.
LOS This indicates the number of Loss of Signal (LOS) failures since the last
1-day period.
LOF This indicates the number of Loss of Framing (LOF) failures since the last
1-day period.
Previous1 day
time This indicates VDSL performance information recorded in the past one
day.
FEC This indicates the number of Forward Error Correction Seconds (FECs)
failures in the past one day.
CRC This indicates the number of CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check) error(s) in
the past one day.
ES This indicates the number of port endpoint errored seconds (ESs) in the
past one day.
SES This indicates the number of port endpoint severely errored seconds
(SESs) in the past one day.
UAS This indicates the number of UnAvailable Seconds (UAS) in the past one
day.
LOS This indicates the number of Loss of Signal (LOS) failures in the past one
day.
LOF This indicates the number of Loss of Framing (LOF) failures in the past
one day.
Total time This indicates the number of packets transmitted/received through the
VDSL connection since the last reset.
FEC This indicates the number of Forward Error Correction Seconds (FECs)
failures since the connection is up.
CRC This indicates the number of CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check) error(s)
since the connection is up.
ES This indicates the number of port endpoint errored seconds (ESs) since
the connection is up.
SES This indicates the number of port endpoint severely errored seconds
(SESs) since the connection is up.
UAS This indicates the number of UnAvailable Seconds (UAS) since the
connection is up.
LOS This indicates the number of Loss of Signal (LOS) failures since the
connection is up.
LOF This indicates the number of Loss of Framing (LOF) failures since the
connection is up.
Table 8 Status > VDSL Statistics (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 Status Screens
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
66
4.2.5 LAN Statistics
Click Status > LAN Statistics to access this screen. Use this screen to view the
LAN statistics.
Figure 25 Status > LAN Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
4.2.6 Client List
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows
individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can
configure the P-870HN-51D as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a
server, the P-870HN-51D provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If
Table 9 Status > LAN Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface.
Received
Bytes This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface.
Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this
interface.
Drops This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
Transmitted
Bytes This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface.
Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this
interface.
Drops This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Refresh
Interval Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field.
Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the
Refresh Interval field.
Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics.
Chapter 4 Status Screens
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 67
DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or
else the computer must be manually configured.
Click Status > Client List to open the following screen. The read-only DHCP table
shows current DHCP client information (including IP Address, Host Name and
MAC Address) of all network clients using the P-870HN-51D’s DHCP server.
Figure 26 Status > Client List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 10 Status > Client List
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Host Name This indicates the computer host name.
MAC Address Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control)
address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six
pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
This indicates the MAC address of the client computer.
IP Address This indicates the IP address assigned to this client computer.
Chapter 4 Status Screens
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
68
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 69
CHAPTER 5
WAN Setup
5.1 Overview
This chapter discusses the P-870HN-51D’s WAN screens. Use these screens to
configure your P-870HN-51D for Internet access.
A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another
network or the Internet. It connects your private networks, such as a LAN (Local
Area Network), and other networks, so that a computer in one location can
communicate with computers in other locations.
Figure 27 LAN and WAN
See Section 5.6 on page 84 for advanced technical information on WAN.
5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Layer 2 Interface screen lets you view, remove or add a layer-2 WAN
interface (Section 5.4 on page 71).
•The Internet Connection screen lets you view and configure the WAN settings
on the P-870HN-51D for Internet access (Section 5.5 on page 73).
WAN
LAN
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
70
5.2 What You Need to Know
Encapsulation Method
Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower
layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the
same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your
ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet), they
should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user
authentication.
WAN IP Address
The WAN IP address is an IP address for the P-870HN-51D, which makes it
accessible from an outside network. It is used by the P-870HN-51D to
communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or
dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the P-870HN-51D tries to access the
Internet.
If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the
subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use
the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method).
PTM
Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) is packet-oriented and supported by the VDSL2
standard. In PTM, packets are encapsulated directly in the High-level Data Link
Control (HDLC) frames. It is designed to provide a low-overhead, transparent way
of transporting packets over DSL links, as an alternative to ATM.
Table 11 WAN Setup Overview
LAYER-2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTION
INTERFACE CONNECTION
MODE WAN SERVICE
TYPE CONNECTION SETTINGS
PTM Default Mode
VLAN MUX
Mode
MSC Mode
PPPoE PPP user name and
password, WAN IP address,
DNS server and default
gateway
IPoE WAN IP address, NAT, DNS
server and default gateway
Bridging N/A
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 71
5.3 Before You Begin
You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP
address. Get this information from your ISP.
5.4 The Layer 2 Interface Screen
The P-870HN-51D must have a layer-2 interface to allow users to use the DSL
port to access the Internet.
Figure 28 Layer 2 Interface
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 12 Layer 2 Interface
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface This is the name of the interface.
Connection Mode This displays the connection mode of the layer-2 interface.
QoS This displays whether QoS (Quality of Service) is enabled on the P-
870HN-51D.
Remove Click the Remove button to delete this interface from the P-870HN-
51D. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete
the interface.
Note: You cannot remove the layer-2 interface when a WAN
service is associated with it.
Add Click this button to create a new layer-2 interface.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
72
5.4.1 Layer 2 Interface Configuration
Click the Add button in the Layer 2 Interface screen to open the following
screen. Use this screen to create a new layer-2 interface. At the time of writing,
you can configure only one PTM layer-2 interface on the P-870HN-51D.
Figure 29 Layer 2 Interface Configuration: DSL PTM WAN
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 13 Layer 2 Interface Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Select
Connection Mode Select Default Mode to allow only one WAN service over a single
virtual circuit.
Select MSC Mode to allow multiple WAN services over a single virtual
circuit. Each WAN connection has its own MAC address.
Select VLAN MUX Mode to allow multiplexing of multiple protocols
over a single virtual circuit. You need to assign a VLAN ID and priority
level to traffic through each WAN connection. All WAN connections
share one MAC address.
Enable Quality Of
Service Select this option to activate QoS (Quality of Service) on this interface
to group and prioritize traffic. Traffic is grouped according to the VLAN
group.
The QoS setting applies to all WAN connections over the same PVC.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any
changes.
Apply/Save Click this button to save your changes and go back to the previous
screen.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 73
5.5 The Internet Connection Screen
Use this screen to change your P-870HN-51D’s WAN settings. Click Network >
WAN > Internet Connection. The summary table shows you the configured
WAN services (connections) on the P-870HN-51D.
To use NAT, firewall or IGMP proxy in the P-870HN-51D, you need to configure a
WAN connection with PPPoE or IPoE.
Note: When a layer-2 interface is in VLAN MUX Mode or MSC Mode, you can
configure up to eight WAN services for each interface.
Figure 30 Internet Connection
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 14 Internet Connection
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface This shows the name of the interface used by this connection.
A default name ipoa0, pppoa1 or ptm0 indicates the DSL port. The
pppx name (where x starts from 0 and is the index number of PPP
connection on the P-870HN-51D) indicates a PPP connection.
The number after the dot (.) represents the VLAN ID number assigned
to traffic sent through this connection. The number after the
underscore (_) represents the index number of connections through
the same interface.
(null) means the entry is not valid.
Description This is the service name of this connection.
0 and 35 or 0 and 1 are the default VPI and VCI numbers. The last
number represents the index number of connections over the same
PVC or the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this
connection.
(null) means the entry is not valid.
Type This shows the layer-2 interface type and method of encapsulation
used by this connection.
Rate This shows the maximum data rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic sent
through this connection. This displays N/A when there is no limit on
transmission rate.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
74
5.5.1 WAN Connection Configuration
Click the Edit or Add button in the WAN Service screen to configure a WAN
connection.
5.5.1.1 WAN Interface
This screen displays when you add a new WAN connection.
Figure 31 WAN Configuration: WAN Interface
Vlan8021p This indicates the 802.1P priority level assigned to traffic sent through
this connection. This displays N/A when there is no priority level
assigned.
VlanMuxId This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through
this connection. This displays N/A when there is no VLAN ID number
assigned.
ConnId This shows the index number of each connection. This displays N/A
when the interface used by the connection is in Default Mode.
IGMP This shows whether IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is
activated or not for this connection. IGMP is not available when the
connection uses the bridging service.
NAT This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this interface. NAT is
not available when the connection uses the bridging service.
Firewall This shows whether the firewall is activated or not for this connection.
The firewall is not available when the connection uses the bridging
service.
Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection.
Click the Remove icon to delete the WAN connection.
Add Click Add to create a new connection.
Table 14 Internet Connection
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 75
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
5.5.1.2 Service Type
Use this screen to configure how you want the P-870HN-51D to connect to the
Internet.
Figure 32 WAN Configuration: Service Type
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 15 WAN Configuration: WAN Interface
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Select a layer 2
interface for this
service
Select a PTM interface to use the DSL port as the WAN port and use
the VDSL technology for data transmission.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Next Click this button to continue.
Table 16 WAN Configuration: Service Type
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Select WAN
service type Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP.
Choices are PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE), IP over Ethernet and
Bridging.
Enter Service
Description Specify a name for this connection or use the automatically generated
one.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
76
5.5.1.3 WAN IP Address and DNS Server
The screen differs by the encapsulation you selected in the previous screen. See
Section 5.6 on page 84 for more information.
Rate Limit Enter the maximum transmission rate in Kbps for traffic sent through the
WAN connection. Otherwise, leave this field blank to disable the rate
limit.
This field is not available for an ATM connection.
MTU [1-1500] Type the maximum size of each data packet, in bytes, that can move
through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the P-870HN-51D
divides it into smaller fragments. Allowed values are 1 - 1500. Usually,
this value is 1500.
Tag VLAN ID
for egress
packets
Select this option to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing
traffic through this connection.
This field is available when the Connect interface is in VLAN MUX mode.
Enter 802.1P
Priority IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into
a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service.
Type the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through
this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level.
This field is available when the Connect interface is in VLAN MUX mode.
Enter 802.1Q
VLAN ID Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this
connection.
This field is available when the PTM interface is in VLAN MUX mode.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Next Click this button to continue.
Table 16 WAN Configuration: Service Type
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 77
PPPoE
This screen displays when you select PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) in the WAN
Service Configuration screen.
Figure 33 WAN Configuration: PPPoE
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 17 WAN Configuration: PPPoE
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name
in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name,
then enter both components exactly as given.
PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above.
PPPoE Service
Name Type the name of your PPPoE service here.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
78
Authentication
Method The P-870HN-51D supports PAP (Password Authentication Protocol)
and CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol). CHAP is
more secure than PAP; however, PAP is readily available on more
platforms.
Use the drop-down list box to select an authentication protocol for
outgoing calls. Options are:
AUTO - Your P-870HN-51D accepts either CHAP or PAP when
requested by this remote node.
CHAP - Your P-870HN-51D accepts CHAP only.
PAP - Your P-870HN-51D accepts PAP only.
MSCHAP - Your P-870HN-51D accepts MSCHAP only. MS-CHAP is the
Microsoft version of the CHAP.
Enable NAT Select this option to enable NAT on the P-870HN-51D. You can also
select the NAT Type you want the P-870HN-51D to implement. The
choices are as follows:
•Symmetric NAT (default) - Symmetric NAT maps requests from
the same private IP address and port to a different public source IP
address and/or port depending on the packet's destination IP
address.
•Port Restricted Cone NAT - Restricted cone NAT maps all
requests from the same private IP address and port to the same
public source IP address and port.
•Restricted Cone NAT - Restricted cone NAT maps all requests
from the same private IP address to the same public source IP
address.
•Full Cone NAT - In full cone NAT, all requests from the same
private IP address and port are mapped to the same public source
IP address and port. Someone on the Internet only needs to know
the mapping scheme in order to send packets to a device behind
the NAT router.
Dial on Demand Select this check box when you do not want the connection up all the
time and specify an idle time-out in the Inactivity Timeout field.
Inactivity
Timeout Specify an idle time-out when you select Dial on Demand. The
default setting is 0, which means the Internet session will not timeout.
Use Static IPv4
Address A static IPv4 address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic
IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time
you connect to the Internet. Select this if you want to use a static IP
address instead of a dynamic IP address.
IPv4 Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP.
Enable PPP
Debug Mode Select this option to display PPP debugging messages on the console.
Table 17 WAN Configuration: PPPoE
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 79
IPoE
This screen displays when you select IP over Ethernet in the WAN Service
Configuration screen.
Figure 34 WAN Configuration: IPoE
Bridge PPPoE
Frames Between
WAN and Local
Ports
Select this option to forward PPPoE packets from the WAN port to the
LAN ports and from the LAN ports to the WAN port.
In addition to the P-870HN-51D's built-in PPPoE client, you can select
this to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software
on their computers to connect to the ISP via the P-870HN-51D. Each
host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address.
This is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not
appropriate.
Clear this if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE
client software on their computers to connect to the ISP.
Enable IGMP
Multicast Proxy Select this check box to have the P-870HN-51D act as an IGMP proxy
on this connection. This allows the P-870HN-51D to get subscribing
information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast
group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Next Click this button to continue.
Table 17 WAN Configuration: PPPoE
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
80
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 18 WAN Configuration: IPoE
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Obtain an IP
address
automatically
A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP
address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you
connect to the Internet. Select this if you want to get a dynamic IP
address from the ISP.
Enable DHCP
Option 60 Select this to identify the vendor and functionality of the P-870HN-
51D in DHCP requests that the P-870HN-51D sends to a DHCP server
when getting a WAN IP address.
Vendor Class
Identifier Enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60), such as the type of the
hardware or firmware.
Enable DHCP
Option 61 Select this to identify the P-870HN-51D in DHCP requests that the P-
870HN-51D sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP address.
IAID Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the P-870HN-51D.
For example, the WAN connection index number.
DUID Type Select Other to enter any string that identifies the P-870HN-51D in
the DUID field.
Select DUID-LL (DUID Based on Link-layer Address) to enter the P-
870HN-51D’s hardware address, that is the MAC address in the DUID
field.
Select DUID-EN (DUID Assigned by Vendor Based on Enterprise
Number) to enter the vendor’s registered private enterprise number.
DUID Enter the DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) of the P-870HN-51D.
Identifier Enter a unique identifier assigned by the vendor.
This field is available when you select DUID-EN in the DUID Type
field.
Enable DHCP
Option 125 Select this to add vendor specific information to DHCP requests that
the P-870HN-51D sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP
address.
Manufacturer
OUI Specify the vendor’s OUI (Organization Unique Identifier). It is usually
the first three bytes of the MAC address.
Product Class Enter the product class of the P-870HN-51D.
Model Name Enter the model name of the P-870HN-51D.
Serial Number Enter the serial number of the P-870HN-51D.
Use the following
Static IP address Select this if you have a static IP address.
WAN IP
Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP.
WAN Subnet
Mask Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP.
WAN gateway
IP Address Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Next Click this button to continue.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 81
5.5.1.4 NAT, IGMP Multicast and Firewall Activation
The screen is available only when you select IP over Ethernet in the WAN
Service Configuration screen.
Figure 35 WAN Configuration: NAT, IGMP Multicast and Firewall Activation
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 19 WAN Configuration: NAT, IGMP Multicast and Firewall Activation
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable NAT Select this option to enable NAT on the P-870HN-51D. You can also
select the NAT Type you want the P-870HN-51D to implement. The
choices are as follows:
•Symmetric NAT (default) - Symmetric NAT maps requests from
the same private IP address and port to a different public source IP
address and/or port depending on the packet's destination IP
address.
•Port Restricted Cone NAT - Restricted cone NAT maps all
requests from the same private IP address and port to the same
public source IP address and port.
•Restricted Cone NAT - Restricted cone NAT maps all requests
from the same private IP address to the same public source IP
address.
•Full Cone NAT - In full cone NAT, all requests from the same
private IP address and port are mapped to the same public source
IP address and port. Someone on the Internet only needs to know
the mapping scheme in order to send packets to a device behind
the NAT router.
Enable Firewall Select this check box to activate Firewall on this connection.
Enable IGMP
Multicast Proxy Select this check box to have the P-870HN-51D act as an IGMP proxy
on this connection. This allows the P-870HN-51D to get subscribing
information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast
group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Next Click this button to continue.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
82
5.5.1.5 Default Gateway
The screen is not available when you select Bridging in the WAN Service
Configuration screen.
Figure 36 WAN Configuration: Default Gateway
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
5.5.1.6 DNS Server
The screen is not available when you select Bridging in the WAN Service
Configuration screen.
Figure 37 WAN Configuration: DNS Server
Table 20 WAN Configuration: Default Gateway: PPPoE, PPPoA, IPoE or IPoA
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Selected Default
Gateway
Interfaces
Select a WAN interface through which you want to forward the traffic.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Next Click this button to continue.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 83
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
5.5.1.7 Configuration Summary
This read-only screen shows the current WAN connection settings.
Figure 38 WAN Configuration: Configuration Summary
Table 21 WAN Configuration: DNS Server
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Obtain DNS info
from a WAN
interface
Select this to have the P-870HN-51D get the DNS server addresses
from the ISP automatically.
WAN Interface
selected Select a WAN interface through which you want to obtain the DNS
related information.
Use the following
Static DNS IP
address
Select this to have the P-870HN-51D use the DNS server addresses
you configure manually.
Primary DNS
server Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
Secondary
DNS server Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Next Click this button to continue.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
84
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
5.6 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the P-870HN-
51D features described in this chapter.
Encapsulation
Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The P-870HN-51D
can work in bridge mode or routing mode. When the P-870HN-51D is in routing
mode, it supports the following methods.
IP over Ethernet
IP over Ethernet (IPoE) is an alternative to PPPoE. IP packets are being delivered
across an Ethernet network, without using PPP encapsulation. They are routed
between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that
they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates
routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells.
Table 22 WAN Configuration: Configuration Summary
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Connection Type This is the encapsulation method used by this connection.
Service Name This is the name of the service.
Service Category This is the ATM traffic class.
This field is blank for a PTM or Ethernet WAN conenction.
IP Address This shows whether the WAN IP address is assigned by the ISP,
manually configured or not configurable.
Service State This shows whether this service is active or not.
NAT This shows whether NAT is active or not for this connection.
NAT Type This shows the type of NAT implemented for this connection.
Firewall This shows whether Firewall is active or not for this connection.
Quality Of
Service This shows whether QoS is active or not for this connection.
IGMP Multicast This shows whether IGMP multicasting is active or not for this
connection.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Apply/Save Click this button to save your changes.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 85
PPP over Ethernet
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) provides access control and billing
functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. PPPoE is an IETF
standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a
broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that
works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS).
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network
services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service
provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as
it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the P-870HN-51D (rather than individual
computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed,
since the P-870HN-51D does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of
the LAN's computers will have access.
IP Address Assignment
A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP
assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be
enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However the
encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default
gateway.
Full Cone NAT
In full cone NAT, the NAT router maps all outgoing packets from an internal IP
address and port to a single IP address and port on the external network. The NAT
router also maps packets coming to that external IP address and port to the
internal IP address and port.
In the following example, the P-870HN-51D maps the source address of all
packets sent from the internal IP address 1 and port A to IP address 2 and port B
on the external network. The P-870HN-51D also performs NAT on all incoming
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
86
packets sent to IP address 2 and port B and forwards them to IP address 1, port
A.
Figure 39 Full Cone NAT Example
Symmetric NAT
The full, restricted and port restricted cone NAT types use the same mapping for
an outgoing packet’s source address regardless of the destination IP address and
port. In symmetric NAT, the mapping of an outgoing packet’s source address to a
source address in another network is different for each different destination IP
address and port.
In the following example, the P-870HN-51D maps the source address IP address 1
and port A to IP address 2 and port B on the external network for packets sent to
IP address 3 and port C. The P-870HN-51D uses a different mapping (IP address
2 and port M) for packets sent to IP address 4 and port D.
A host on the external network (IP address 3 and port C for example) can only
send packets to the internal host via the external IP address and port that the NAT
router used in sending a packet to the external host’s IP address and port. So in
2, B
1, A
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 87
the example, only 3, C is allowed to send packets to 2, B and only 4, D is allowed
to send packets to 2, M.
Figure 40 Symmetric NAT
Introduction to VLANs
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned
into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A
device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly
talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must
first go through a router.
In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and
security among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one
subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN,
thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same
building.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and
more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments,
all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all
broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain.
Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the
VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch
on which they were created. The VLANs can be created statically by hand or
dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN
and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the
network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and
1, A 2, M
2, B
4, D
4, E
3, C
5, B
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
88
contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/
length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information),
starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame).
The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for
Ethernet switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then
that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining
twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum number of 4,096
VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A
frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that
only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given
as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify
priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN
configurations are 4,094.
Multicast
IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1
recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers
IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1.
Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to
establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP
version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP
version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information
about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections
4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and
can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not
assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address
224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of
all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order
to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers
group.
At start up, the P-870HN-51D queries all directly connected networks to gather
group membership. After that, the P-870HN-51D periodically updates this
information.
DNS Server Address Assignment
Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP
address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is
TPID
2 Bytes
User Priority
3 Bits
CFI
1 Bit
VLAN ID
12 Bits
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 89
204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must
know the IP address of a computer before you can access it.
The P-870HN-51D can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways.
1The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information
sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually
enter them in the DNS server fields.
2If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the P-
870HN-51D’s WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server
address from the ISP.
Chapter 5 WAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
90
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 91
CHAPTER 6
LAN Setup
6.1 Overview
A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many
computers are attached. A LAN is usually located in one immediate area such as a
building or floor of a building.
The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP
addresses.
• See Section 6.4 on page 95 for more information on LANs.
• See Appendix E on page 321 for more information on IP addresses and
subnetting.
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The LAN IP screen lets you set the LAN IP address and subnet mask of your
ZyXEL device and configure other LAN TCP/IP settings (Section 6.3 on page 93).
LAN
Chapter 6 LAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
92
6.2 What You Need To Know
IP Address
Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do
computers on a LAN share one common network number. This is known as an
Internet Protocol address.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your P-
870HN-51D will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address
that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the P-
870HN-51D unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
DHCP
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) allows clients to obtain TCP/IP
configuration at start-up from a server. This P-870HN-51D has a built-in DHCP
server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that
support DHCP client capability.
DHCP Relay
You can also configure the P-870HN-51D to relay client DHCP requests to a DHCP
server and the server’s responses back to the clients.
RIP
RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing
information with other routers.
Multicast and IGMP
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1
sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network).
Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody
and not just 1.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to
establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data.
There are two versions 1 and 2. IGMP version 2 is an improvement over version 1
but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use.
Chapter 6 LAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 93
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP
address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without
it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS
server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client
machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask.
6.3 The LAN IP Screen
Click Network > LAN to open the IP screen. See Section 6.4 on page 95 for
background information. Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address
and subnet mask of your P-870HN-51D.
Figure 41 LAN > IP
Chapter 6 LAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
94
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 23 LAN > IP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LAN TCP/IP
Group Name Select the interface group for which you want to configure the LAN
TCP/IP settings. See Chapter 19 on page 213 for how to create a new
interface group.
IP Address Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your P-870HN-51D in
dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default).
IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for
example 255.255.255.0 (factory default).
DHCP Setup
Enable DHCP Select this to have the P-870HN-51D act as a DHCP server or DHCP
relay agent.
Otherwise, deselect this to not have the P-870HN-51D provide any
DHCP services. The DHCP server will be disabled.
DHCP Server Select this option to have the P-870HN-51D assign IP addresses and
provide subnet mask, gateway, and DNS server information to the
network. The P-870HN-51D is the DHCP server for the network.
When the P-870HN-51D acts as a DHCP server, the following items
need to be set:
IP Pool
Starting
Address
This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP
address pool.
Pool Size This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool.
DHCP Relay Select this option to have the P-870HN-51D forward DHCP request to
the DHCP server.
Relay Server If you select DHCP Relay, enter the IP address of the DHCP server.
DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server
Obtain DNS info
from a WAN
interface
When a LAN client sends a DNS query to the P-870HN-51D, the P-
870HN-51D forwards the query to the system DNS server configured
in the WAN interface you select.
If you do not configure DNS servers on the selected WAN inteface, the
P-870HN-51D uses the LAN IP address and tells the DHCP clients on
the LAN that itself is the DNS server.
Use the following Static DNS IP address
First DNS
Server Enter the first DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address the P-
870HN-51D passes to the DHCP clients.
Second DNS
Server Enter the second DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address the
P-870HN-51D passes to the DHCP clients.
IGMP Snooping
Enable IGMP
Snooping Select this option to enable IGMP snooping. This allows the P-870HN-
51D to passively learn multicast group.
Standard
Mode Select this to have the P-870HN-51D forward multicast packets to a
port that joins the multicast group and broadcast unknown multicast
packets from the WAN to all LAN ports.
Chapter 6 LAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 95
6.4 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the P-870HN-
51D features described in this chapter.
LANs, WANs and the ZyXEL Device
The actual physical connection determines whether the P-870HN-51D ports are
LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN
network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next.
Figure 42 LAN and WAN IP Addresses
DHCP Setup
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows
individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can
configure the P-870HN-51D as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a
server, the P-870HN-51D provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you
turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else
the computer must be manually configured.
Blocking Mode Select this to have the P-870HN-51D block all unknown multicast
packets from the WAN.
Enable IP Alias Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the P-
870HN-51D.
IP Address Enter the IP address of your P-870HN-51D in dotted decimal notation.
IP Subnet
Mask Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for
example 255.255.255.0 (factory default).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Table 23 LAN > IP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WAN
LAN
Chapter 6 LAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
96
IP Pool Setup
The P-870HN-51D is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP
clients (DHCP Pool). See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not
assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers.
LAN TCP/IP
The P-870HN-51D has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses
and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability.
IP Address and Subnet Mask
Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do
computers on a LAN share one common network number.
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If
the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP
addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet
mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you
have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when
the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select
a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the
Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the P-870HN-51D. The Internet
Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for
private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise.
Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254
individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are
reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number
while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to
remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your P-870HN-51D, but make sure that
no other device on your network is using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your P-
870HN-51D will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address
that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the P-
870HN-51D unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are
isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you
can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet
Chapter 6 LAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 97
Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP
addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned
from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet
access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for
your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger
organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP
addresses.
Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address
assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, “Address Allocation for Private
Internets” and RFC 1466, “Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space”.
Multicast
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1
sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network).
Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody
and not just 1.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to
establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP
version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP
version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information
about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections
4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and
can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not
assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address
224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of
all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order
to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers
group.
The P-870HN-51D supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2
(IGMP-v2). At start up, the P-870HN-51D queries all directly connected networks
to gather group membership. After that, the P-870HN-51D periodically updates
this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/disabled on the P-870HN-51D
LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the web configurator (LAN; WAN). Select None to
disable IP multicasting on these interfaces.
Chapter 6 LAN Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
98
IP Alias
IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks
over the same Ethernet interface. The P-870HN-51D supports three logical LAN
interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the P-870HN-51D itself as
the gateway for each LAN network.
When you use IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access
between the LAN's logical networks (subnets).
Note: Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do not overlap.
The following figure shows a LAN divided into subnets A and B.
Figure 43 Physical Network & Partitioned Logical Networks
Ethernet
Interface
A: 192.168.1.1 - 192.168.1.24
B: 192.168.2.1 - 192.168.2.24
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 99
CHAPTER 7
Wireless LAN
7.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to perform tasks related to setting up and optimizing
your wireless network, including the following.
• Turning the wireless connection on or off.
• Configuring a name, wireless channel and security for the network.
• Using WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) to configure your wireless network.
• Using a MAC (Media Access Control) address filter to restrict access to the
wireless network.
See Chapter 2 on page 27 for a tutorial showing how to set up your wireless
connection in an example scenario.
See Section 7.9 on page 117 for advanced technical information on wireless
networks.
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
This chapter describes the P-870HN-51D’s Network > Wireless LAN screens.
Use these screens to set up your P-870HN-51D’s wireless connection.
•The General screen lets you turn the wireless connection on or off, set up
wireless security and make other basic configuration changes (Section 7.4 on
page 102). You can also configure the MAC filter to allow or block access to the
P-870HN-51D based on the MAC addresses of the wireless stations.
•The More AP screen lets you set up multiple wireless networks on your P-
870HN-51D (Section 7.5 on page 112).
•Use the WPS screen and the WPS Station screen to use WiFi Protected Setup
(WPS). WPS lets you set up a secure network quickly, when connecting to other
WPS-enabled devices.
Use the WPS screen (see Section 7.6 on page 113) to enable or disable WPS,
generate a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) and see information
about the P-870HN-51D’s WPS status.
Use the WPS Station (see Section 7.7 on page 115) screen to set up WPS by
pressing a button or using a PIN.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
100
•The Advanced Setup screen lets you change the wireless mode, and make
other advanced wireless configuration changes (Section 7.8 on page 116).
You don’t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless
connection. For example, you may just want to set up a network name, a wireless
radio channel and some security in the General screen.
7.2 What You Need to Know
Wireless Basics
“Wireless” is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie
radios send and receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking
devices exchange information with one another. A wireless networking device is
just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios
attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking
devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not
require a license to use. However, wireless networking is different from that of
most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless
networking standards available with different methods of data encryption.
Wireless Network Construction
Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges.
• A wireless client is a radio connected to a user’s computer.
• An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can
connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network.
• A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and
wireless clients, extending a network’s range.
Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways.
• An “infrastructure” type of network has one or more access points and one or
more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points.
• An “ad-hoc” type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless
clients connect to one another in order to exchange information.
Network Names
Each network must have a name, referred to as the SSID - “Service Set
IDentifier”. The “service set” is the network, so the “service set identifier” is the
network’s name. This helps you identify your wireless network when wireless
networks’ coverage areas overlap and you have a variety of networks to choose
from.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 101
Radio Channels
In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed,
civilian use. For the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into
numerous channels. This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place
without interfering with one another. When you create a network, you must select
a channel to use.
Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the
number of available channels also varies.
Wireless Security
By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data
networks, this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without
security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves, but also join the
network. Once an unauthorized person has access to the network she/he can
either steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to
compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have
been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data
network, or understand the data carried on it.
These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that
only people presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a
“key” phrase) can access the network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the
information sent over the air is encoded. Only people with the code key can
understand the information, and only people who have been authenticated are
given the code key.
These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the
old Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at
all, but it will not keep a determined attacker out. Other security standards are
secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly. For
example, the WPA-PSK security standard is perfectly secure if you use a long key
which is difficult for an attacker’s software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter
long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if
you use a short key which is very easy to guess.
Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, it’s not just
people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security.
Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is
in place.
A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use
obscure information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a
way that appears random and does not include real words. For example, if your
mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
102
(which you know was made in 1971) you could use “70dodchal71vanpoi” as your
security key.
Signal Problems
Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to
limitations of distance, interference and absorption.
Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with
interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference
may come from other radio transmissions, such as military or air traffic control
communications, or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric
motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when physical objects
(such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal.
7.3 Before You Begin
Before you start using these screens, ask yourself the following questions. See
Section 7.2 on page 100 if some of the terms used here do not make sense to
you.
• What wireless standards do the other wireless devices support (IEEE 802.11g,
for example)? What is the most appropriate standard to use?
• What security options do the other wireless devices support (WPA-PSK, for
example)? What is the best one to use?
• Do the other wireless devices support WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)? If so, you
can set up a well-secured network very easily.
Even if some of your devices support WPS and some do not, you can use WPS to
set up your network and then add the non-WPS devices manually, although this
is somewhat more complicated to do.
• What advanced options do you want to configure, if any? If you want to
configure advanced options, ensure that you know precisely what you want to
do. If you do not want to configure advanced options, leave them alone.
7.4 The General Screen
Note: If you are configuring the P-870HN-51D from a computer connected to the
wireless LAN and you change the P-870HN-51D’s SSID or security settings,
you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You
must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the P-
870HN-51D’s new settings.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 103
Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the General screen.
Figure 44 Network > Wireless LAN > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 24 Network > Wireless LAN > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Wireless LAN Click the check box to activate wireless LAN.
Channel
Selection Set the operating frequency/channel depending on your particular region.
Select a channel or use Auto to have the P-870HN-51D automatically
determine a channel to use. If you are having problems with wireless
interference, changing the channel may help. Try to use a channel that is
as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as
possible. The channel number which the P-870HN-51D is currently using
then displays next to this field.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
104
7.4.1 No Security
Select No Security to allow wireless devices to communicate with the access
points without any data encryption or authentication.
Bandwidth Select whether the P-870HN-51D uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz
or 40MHz.
A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps
whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds
of up to 300 Mbps.
40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio
channels to increase throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40
MHz. It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the
environment hinders the wireless signal.
Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless
devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support
channel bonding.
This field is available only when you set the 802.11 Mode to 802.11n
Only or 802.11b/g/n Mixed in the Advanced Setup screen.
Network
Name (SSID) The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a
wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access
point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32
printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN.
Note: If you are configuring the P-870HN-51D from a computer
connected to the wireless LAN and you change the P-870HN-
51D’s SSID or wireless security settings, you will lose your
wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You
must then change the wireless settings of your computer to
match the P-870HN-51D’s new settings.
Hide Network
Name (SSID) Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a
station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the P-870HN-51D
when wireless LAN is enabled.
Security
Mode See the following sections for more details about this field.
MAC Filter Click this button to go to the MAC Filter screen to configure whether the
wireless devices with the MAC addresses listed are allowed or denied to
access the P-870HN-51D using this SSID.
Apply Click this to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
Table 24 Network > Wireless LAN > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 105
Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your P-870HN-51D, your network
is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.
Figure 45 Wireless LAN > General: No Security
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Wireless LAN > General: No Security
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security
Mode Choose No Security from the drop-down list box.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
106
7.4.2 WEP Encryption
In order to configure and enable WEP encryption; click Network > Wireless LAN
to display the General screen. Select WEP from the Security Mode list.
Figure 46 Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP Encryption
The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.
Table 26 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP Encryption
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security
Mode Choose WEP from the drop-down list box.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 107
7.4.3 WPA(2)-PSK
In order to configure and enable WPA(2)-PSK authentication; click Network >
Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
from the Security Mode list.
Figure 47 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2)-PSK
WEP
Encryption WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) provides data encryption to prevent
unauthorized wireless stations from accessing data transmitted over the
wireless network.
Select 64-bit or 128-bit to enable data encryption.
Key 1 to Key
4The WEP key is used to secure your data from eavesdropping by
unauthorized wireless users. Both the P-870HN-51D and the wireless
stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission.
Only one key can be activated at any one time. Select a default key to use
for data encryption.
If you chose 64-bit in the WEP Encryption field, then enter any 5
characters (ASCII string) or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F")
preceded by 0x for each key.
If you chose 128-bit in the WEP Encryption field, then enter 13
characters (ASCII string) or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F")
preceded by 0x for each key.
Table 26 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP Encryption
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
108
The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.
7.4.4 WPA(2) Authentication
Use this screen to configure and enable WPA or WPA2 authentication; click the
Wireless LAN link under Network to display the General screen. Select WPA or
WPA2 from the Security Mode list.
Note: WPA or WPA2 is not available if you enable WPS before you configure WPA or
WPA2 in the Wireless LAN > General screen.
Table 27 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2)-PSK
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Auto Generate
Key This field is only available for WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK.
Select this option to have the P-870HN-51D automatically generate an
SSID and pre-shared key. The SSID and Pre-Shared Key fields will
not be configurable when you select this option.
Security Mode Choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box.
Active
Compatible This field is only available for WPA2-PSK. Select this if you want the P-
870HN-51D to support WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously.
Encryption Select the encryption type (TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES) for data
encryption.
Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP.
Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.
Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or
AES.
Pre-Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the
same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a
simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials.
Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters
(including spaces and symbols).
Group Key
Update Timer The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP sends a new
group key out to all clients.
ReKey Method Select Time to change encryption keys automatically using the time
interval specified in the Group Key Update Timer field. If no value is
entered in the said field, this feature is disabled.
Select None if you do not want to use this feature.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 109
Note: If you select WPA or WPA2 in the Wireless LAN > General screen, the WDS
and WPS features are not available on the P-870HN-51D.
Figure 48 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2)
The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.
Table 28 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security Mode Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box.
Active
Compatible This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the P-
870HN-51D to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously.
Encryption Select the encryption type (TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES) for data
encryption.
Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP.
Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.
Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or
AES.
Group Key
Update Timer The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server
sends a new group key out to all clients.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
110
7.4.5 MAC Filter
This screen allows you to configure the P-870HN-51D to give exclusive access to
specific devices (Allow) or exclude specific devices from accessing the P-870HN-
51D (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control)
address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of
hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the
MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen.
Use this screen to change your P-870HN-51D’s MAC filter settings. Click the Edit
button in the Wireless LAN > General screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 49 Wireless LAN > MAC Filter
ReKey Method Select Time to change encryption keys automatically using the time
interval specified in the Group Key Update Timer field. If no value is
entered in the said field, this feature is disabled.
Select None if you do not want to use this feature.
Authentication Server
IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted
decimal notation.
Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The
default port number is 1812.
You need not change this value unless your network administrator
instructs you to do so with additional information.
Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be
shared between the external authentication server and the P-870HN-
51D.
The key must be the same on the external authentication server and
your P-870HN-51D. The key is not sent over the network.
Table 28 Wireless LAN > General: WPA(2)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 111
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.4.6 Adding a New MAC Filtering Rule
Click the Add button in the MAC Filter screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 50 Wireless LAN > MAC Filter > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 29 Wireless LAN > MAC Filter
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MAC Restrict
Mode
Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the table below.
Select Disabled to turn off MAC address filtering.
Select Allow to permit access to the P-870HN-51D, MAC addresses not
listed will be denied access to the P-870HN-51D.
Select Deny to block access to the P-870HN-51D, MAC addresses not listed
will be allowed to access the P-870HN-51D
#This is the index number of the MAC address.
MAC
Address This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied
access to the P-870HN-51D.
Modify Click the Remove icon to delete the entry.
Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Add Click this to create a new MAC filtering rule.
Table 30 Wireless LAN > MAC Filter > Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MAC
Address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied
access to the P-870HN-51D in these address fields. Enter the MAC
addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character
pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Apply Click this to save your changes and go back to the previous screen.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
112
7.5 The More AP Screen
This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple wireless networks on the
P-870HN-51D.
Click Network > Wireless LAN > More AP. The following screen displays.
Figure 51 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the index number of each SSID profile.
Active Select the check box to activate an SSID profile.
SSID An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the P-870HN-
51D’s BSSs. The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set
with which a wireless device is associated.
This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When
a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that
is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility.
Security This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile.
Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 113
7.5.1 More AP Edit
Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the
More AP screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 52 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP: Edit
See Section 7.4 on page 102 for more details about the fields in this screen.
7.6 The WPS Screen
Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your P-870HN-51D.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without
having to configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection
between two devices. Both devices must support WPS.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
114
Click Network > Wireless LAN >WPS. The following screen displays.
Figure 53 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WPS Setup
Enable WPS Select the check box to activate WPS on the P-870HN-51D.
PIN Number This shows the PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the P-870HN-
51D. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to
connect to using WPS.
The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method.
Generate Click this button to have the P-870HN-51D create a new PIN.
WPS Status This displays Configured when the P-870HN-51D has connected to a
wireless network using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or
wireless security settings have been changed. The current wireless and
wireless security settings also appear in the screen.
This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there is no wireless
or wireless security changes on the P-870HN-51D or you click
Release_Configuration to remove the configured wireless and
wireless security settings.
Release_Co
nfiguration This button is available when the WPS status is Configured but not
configurable if you disable WPS.
Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security
settings for WPS connections on the P-870HN-51D.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 115
7.7 The WPS Station Screen
Use this screen to set up a WPS wireless network using either Push Button
Configuration (PBC) or PIN Configuration.
Note: If you select No Security in the Wireless LAN > General screen and click
Push Button in the WPS Station screen, the P-870HN-51D automatically
changes to use WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK mixed mode and generates a pre-
shared key.
Click Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station. The following screen displays.
Figure 54 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Push Button Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within
wireless range of the P-870HN-51D) to your wireless network. This
button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a
menu button similar to the Push Button on this screen.
Note: You must press the other wireless device’s WPS button within
two minutes of pressing this button.
Or input
station's PIN
number
Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection
with and click Start to authenticate and add the wireless device to your
wireless network.
You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking
the device’s settings.
Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes
to have it present its PIN to the P-870HN-51D.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
116
7.8 The Advanced Setup Screen
To configure advanced wireless settings, click Network > Wireless LAN >
Advanced Setup. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 55 Wireless LAN > Advanced Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 34 Wireless LAN > Advanced Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
802.11 Mode Select 802.11b Only to only allow IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the P-870HN-51D.
Select 802.11g Only to allow IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to
associate with the P-870HN-51D. IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices
can associate with the P-870HN-51D only when they use the short
premble type.
Select 802.11n Only to only allow IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the P-870HN-51D. This can increase
transmission rates, although IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g clients will
not be able to connect to the P-870HN-51D.
Select 802.11b/g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g
compliant WLAN devices to associate with the P-870HN-51D. The P-
870HN-51D adjusts the transmission rate automatically according to the
wireless standard supported by the wireless devices.
Select 802.11 b/g/n mixed mode to allow both IEEE802.11b,
IEEE802.11g and IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with
the P-870HN-51D. The transmission rate of your P-870HN-51D might be
reduced.
RTS/CTS
Threshold Enter a value between 0 and 2432.
Fragmentation
Threshold This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value
between 256 and 2432.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 117
7.9 Technical Reference
This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see the
appendix.
Number of
Wireless
Stations
Allowed
Specify the maximum number (from 1 to 64) of the wireless stations that
may connect to the P-870HN-51D.
Output Power Set the output power of the P-870HN-51D. If there is a high density of
APs in an area, decrease the output power to reduce interference with
other APs. Select one of the following 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% or
100%.
802.11
Protection Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed-mode networks
(networks with both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g traffic).
Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS/CTS
handshake. This helps improve IEEE 802.11g performance.
Select Off to disable 802.11 protection. The transmission rate of your P-
870HN-51D might be reduced in a mixed-mode network.
This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802.11
Mode to 802.11b Only.
Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop-down list menu. Choices are Long
or Short. The default setting is Long. See the appendix for more
information.
This field is not configurable and the P-870HN-51D uses Short when you
set 802.11 Mode to 802.11g Only or 802.11n Only.
Apply Click this to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
Table 34 Wireless LAN > Advanced Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
118
7.9.1 Wireless Network Overview
The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.
Figure 56 Example of a Wireless Network
The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network,
devices A and B use the access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such
as the printer) or with the Internet. Your P-870HN-51D is the AP.
Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID.
The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentity.
• If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel.
Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific
channel, or frequency, to send and receive information.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with
the AP.
Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also
protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.
AB
AP
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 119
7.9.2 Additional Wireless Terms
The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in
the P-870HN-51D’s Web Configurator.
7.9.3 Wireless Security Overview
The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up
in the wireless network.
7.9.3.1 SSID
Normally, the P-870HN-51D acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID
in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the P-870HN-51D does
not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to
something that is difficult to guess.
This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for
unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless
devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network.
7.9.3.2 MAC Address Filter
Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number,
called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal
Table 35 Additional Wireless Terms
TERM DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices
are sometimes not aware of each other’s presence. This may cause
them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in
information colliding and not getting through.
By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless
devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the
P-870HN-51D. The lower the value, the more often the devices
must get permission.
If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see
below), then wireless devices never have to get permission to send
information to the P-870HN-51D.
Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are
two preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different
preamble mode than the P-870HN-51D does, it cannot
communicate with the P-870HN-51D.
Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use
the wireless network.
Fragmentation
Threshold A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks,
while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network
is not very busy.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
120
characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC
address for each device in the wireless network, see the device’s User’s Guide or
other documentation.
You can use the MAC address filter to tell the P-870HN-51D which devices are
allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use
the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel,
and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not
matter if it has the correct information.
This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless
network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the
MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use
the wireless network.
7.9.3.3 User Authentication
Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to
use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network
before they can use it. However, every device in the wireless network has to
support IEEE 802.1x to do this.
For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user
in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you
do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for
your users.
Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the
wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore,
there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and
password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless
network.
7.9.3.4 Encryption
Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the
wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret
code, you cannot understand the message.
1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks.
These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.
2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 121
The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication.
(See Section 7.9.3.3 on page 120 for information about this.)
For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA
or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no
encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK.
Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the
wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network
with the P-870HN-51D and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is
no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only
supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up
Static WEP in the wireless network.
Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger
encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still
possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information
pretty quickly.
When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your P-870HN-51D, you can also select
an option (WPA compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the
devices support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or
WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA
compatible option in the P-870HN-51D.
Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless
network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the
wireless network must have the same key.
7.9.4 WiFi Protected Setup
Your P-870HN-51D supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to
set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification,
defined by the WiFi Alliance.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without
having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works
Table 36 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication
NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER
Weakest No Security
WPA
Static WEP
WPA-PSK
Stronges
tWPA2-PSK WPA2
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
122
between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each device’s
documentation to make sure).
Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device
itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification
Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two
devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another
device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a
secure network by themselves.
7.9.4.1 Push Button Configuration
WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each
WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need
to enter any information.
Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS
PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical
button.
Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button.
1Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one
another.
2Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its
configuration utility and locate the button (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to
do this - for the P-870HN-51D, see Section 7.7 on page 115).
3Press the button on one of the devices (it doesn’t matter which). For the P-870HN-
51D you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds.
4Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the
network name (SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the
enrollee.
If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless
clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list,
WPS was successful.
7.9.4.2 PIN Configuration
Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This
may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can
generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface).
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 123
Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you
want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify,
not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you
need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN
method.
When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually
the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless
router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the
second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security
information to the other, allowing it to join the network.
Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or
wireless router (referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN
method.
1Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices.
2Access the WPS section of the AP’s configuration interface. See the device’s User’s
Guide for how to do this.
3Look for the client’s WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the
WPS section of the client’s configuration interface (see the device’s User’s Guide
for how to find the WPS PIN - for the P-870HN-51D, see Section 7.6 on page 113).
4Enter the client’s PIN in the AP’s configuration interface.
Note: If the client device’s configuration interface has an area for entering another
device’s PIN, you can either enter the client’s PIN in the AP, or enter the AP’s
PIN in the client - it does not matter which.
5Start WPS on both devices within two minutes.
Note: Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device
itself.
6On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If
you can connect, WPS was successful.
If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s
configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
124
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook
computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method.
Figure 57 Example WPS Process: PIN Method
7.9.4.3 How WPS Works
When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role.
One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security
settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives
network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible
Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-
PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is
already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates
the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly.
ENROLLEE
SECURE EAP TUNNEL
SSID
WPA(2)-PSK
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
COMMUNICATION
This device’s
WPS
Enter WPS PIN
WPS
from other device:
WPS PIN: 123456
WPS
START
WPS
START
REGISTRAR
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 125
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook
computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point.
Figure 58 How WPS works
The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is
active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the
registrar if necessary.
The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in
each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the
process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device.
Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client
is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can
some WPS-enabled wireless clients.
By default, a WPS devices is “unconfigured”. This means that it is not part of an
existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both
functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the
enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to
another device using WPS, it becomes “configured”. A configured wireless client
can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a
configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all
subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to
act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults.
SECURE TUNNEL
SECURITY INFO
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
COMMUNICATION
ACTIVATE
WPS
ACTIVATE
WPS
WPS HANDSHAKE
REGISTRAR
ENROLLEE
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
126
7.9.4.4 Example WPS Network Setup
This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup.
The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1
are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In
this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar
randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is
unconfigured and has no existing information.
Figure 59 WPS: Example Network Step 1
In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1
supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with
the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use
the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it
already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing
security information to Client 2.
Figure 60 WPS: Example Network Step 2
In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of
range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access
REGISTRARENROLLEE
SECURITY INFO
CLIENT 1 AP1
REGISTRAR
CLIENT 1 AP1
ENROLLEE
CLIENT 2
EXISTING CONNECTION
SECURITY INFO
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 127
point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use
it to perform the WPS handshake instead.
Figure 61 WPS: Example Network Step 3
7.9.4.5 Limitations of WPS
WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware.
• WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client
communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP).
• When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll
multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other.
For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the
first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee,
for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second
device in the same way.
• WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add
non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS.
WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-
PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether
the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check
the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the
network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the
key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS
device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK).
CLIENT 1 AP1
REGISTRAR
CLIENT 2
EXISTING CONNECTION
SECURITY INFO
ENROLLEE
AP2
EXISTING CONNECTION
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
128
• When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you
press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the
other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is
because the registrar has no way of identifying the “correct” enrollee, and
cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible
way for a hacker to gain access to a network.
You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two
devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be
unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open
the access point’s configuration interface and look at the list of associated
clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access
point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS
handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain
access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients
(usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown
MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP.
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 129
CHAPTER 8
Network Address Translation
(NAT)
8.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the P-870HN-51D.
Network Address Translation (NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address
of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used
within one network to a different IP address known within another network.
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Port Forwarding screen lets you configure forward incoming service
requests to the server(s) on your local network (Section 8.3 on page 130).
•The Trigger Port screen lets you change the P-870HN-51D's trigger port
settings (Section 8.4 on page 133).
•The DMZ Host screen lets you configure a default server (Section 8.5 on page
137).
•The ALG screen lets you enable SIP ALG on the P-870HN-51D (Section 8.6 on
page 138).
8.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
NAT
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from
a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address)
before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back,
NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the
inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host.
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
130
Port Forwarding
A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for
example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though
NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside
world.
8.3 The Port Forwarding Screen
This summary screen provides a summary of all port forwarding rules and their
configuration. In addition, this screen allows you to create new port forwarding
rules and delete existing rules.
You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded,
and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a
service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some
cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than
one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify
a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to
a port or a range of ports.
Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server
processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may
periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any
active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.
To access this screen, click Network > NAT. The following screen appears.
Figure 62 NAT Port Forwarding
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 131
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 37 NAT Port Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Service Name Select a pre-defined service from the drop-down list box. The pre-
defined service port number(s) and protocol will display in the External
port, Internal port and Protocol fields.
Otherwise, select User Define to open the Rule Setup screen where
you can manually enter the port number(s) and select the IP protocol.
WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled.
Server IP
Address Enter the IP address of the server for the specified service.
External Port
Start Enter the original destination port for the packets.
To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the External
Port End field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the
end port number in the External Port End field.
External Port
End Enter the last port of the original destination port range.
To forward only one port, enter the port number in the External Port
Start field above and then enter it again in this field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that
begins with the port number in the External Port Start field above.
Internal Port
Start Enter the port number to which you want the P-870HN-51D to translate
the incoming port.
To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the Internal
Port End field.
For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you
want the incoming ports translated.
Internal Port
End Enter the last port of the translated port range.
Protocol This is the transport layer protocol used for the service.
Add Click this button to add a rule to the table below.
No. This is the rule index number (read-only).
Active This field indicates whether the rule is active or not.
Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
Server Name This field displays the name of the service used by the packets for this
virtual server.
WAN Interface This field displays the WAN interface through which the service is
forwarded.
External Start
Port This is the first external port number that identifies a service.
External End
Port This is the last external port number that identifies a service.
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
132
8.3.1 The Port Forwarding Edit Screen
This screen lets you create or edit a port forwarding rule. Select User Define in
the Service Name field or click the rule’s Edit icon in the Port Forwarding
screen to open the following screen.
Figure 63 Port Forwarding Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Internal Start
Port This is the first internal port number that identifies a service.
Internal End
Port This is the last internal port number that identifies a service.
Server IP
Address This field displays the inside IP address of the server.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port
forwarding rule.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule. Note
that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration.
Table 37 NAT Port Forwarding (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 38 Port Forwarding Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
This field is not editable if you are configuring a User Define rule.
Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule. This field is read-only if you click the
Edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen.
WAN Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port forwarding
rules.
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 133
8.4 The Trigger Port Screen
Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated
range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a
forwarding port in NAT to forward a service (coming in from the server on the
WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is
that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to
use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace
the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN
computer's IP address.
Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to
dynamically take turns using the service. The P-870HN-51D records the IP
address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with
a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the P-870HN-51D's
WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("open"
port), the P-870HN-51D forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer
that sent the request. After that computer’s connection for that service closes,
External Start
Port Enter the original destination port for the packets.
To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the External
End Port field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the
end port number in the External End Port field.
External End
Port Enter the last port of the original destination port range.
To forward only one port, enter the port number in the External Start
Port field above and then enter it again in this field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that
begins with the port number in the External Start Port field above.
Internal Start
Port Enter the port number here to which you want the P-870HN-51D to
translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, enter the first number
of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated.
Internal End
Port Enter the last port of the translated port range.
Server IP
Address Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here.
Protocol Select the transport layer protocol supported by this virtual server.
Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 38 Port Forwarding Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
134
another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way
you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN
computer to use the application.
For example:
Figure 64 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example
1Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070).
2Port 7070 is a “trigger” port and causes the P-870HN-51D to record Jane’s
computer IP address. The P-870HN-51D associates Jane's computer IP address
with the "open" port range of 6970-7170.
3The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170.
4The P-870HN-51D forwards the traffic to Jane’s computer IP address.
5Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or
times out. The P-870HN-51D times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram
Protocol) or two hours with TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).
Click NAT > Trigger Port to open the following screen. Use this screen to view
and configure your P-870HN-51D’s trigger port settings.
Figure 65 Trigger Port
Jane’s
Computer
Real Audio Server
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 135
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 NAT Trigger Port
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Service Name Select a pre-defined service from the drop-down list box. The pre-
defined service port number(s) and protocol will display in the Trigger
port, Open port and Protocol fields.
Otherwise, select User Define to open the Rule Setup screen where
you can manually enter the port number(s) and select the transport
layer protocol.
WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
Trigger Port The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers)
the P-870HN-51D to record the IP address of the LAN computer that
sent the traffic to a server on the WAN.
Start This is the first port number that identifies a service.
End This is the last port number that identifies a service.
Protocol This is the transport layer protocol used for the service.
Open Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN
uses when it sends out a particular service. The P-870HN-51D forwards
the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the
LAN that requested the service.
Start This is the first port number that identifies a service.
End This is the last port number that identifies a service.
Protocol This is the transport layer protocol used for the service.
Add Click this button to add a rule to the table below.
No. This is the rule index number (read-only).
Active This field indicates whether the rule is active or not.
Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
Server Name This field displays the name of the service used by the packets for this
virtual server.
WAN Interface This field displays the WAN interface through which the service is
forwarded.
Trigger Start
Port This is the first trigger port number that identifies a service.
Trigger End
Port This is the last trigger port number that identifies a service.
Trigger Proto. This is the trigger transport layer protocol. 1 means TCP, 2 means UDP
and 3 means TCP/UDP.
Open Start
Port This is the first open port number that identifies a service.
Open End Port This is the last open port number that identifies a service.
Open Proto. This is the open transport layer protocol. 1 means TCP, 2 means UDP
and 3 means TCP/UDP.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent
rules move up by one when you take this action.
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
136
8.4.1 Trigger Port Configuration
This screen lets you create new port triggering rules. Click the Add icon in the
NAT - Trigger Port screen to open the following screen.
Figure 66 NAT > Trigger Port > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration.
Table 39 NAT Trigger Port (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 40 NAT > Port Triggering > Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
This field is not editable if you are configuring a User Define rule.
Service
Name Enter a name to identify this rule. This field is read-only if you click the Edit
icon in the Trigger Port screen.
WAN
Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules.
Trigger
Start Port The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the
P-870HN-51D to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the
traffic to a server on the WAN.
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Trigger End
Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Trigger
Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 137
8.5 The DMZ Host Screen
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP
address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the
NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen.
Figure 67 NAT > DMZ Host
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Open Start
Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses
when it sends out a particular service. The P-870HN-51D forwards the
traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN
that requested the service.
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Open End
Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Open
Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P-870HN-51D.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 40 NAT > Port Triggering > Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 41 NAT > DMZ Host
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Default Server Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from
ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen.
Note: If you do not assign a Default Server, the P-870HN-51D
discards all packets received for ports that are not specified
in the NAT Port Forwarding screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
138
8.6 The ALG Screen
Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG
allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses
embedded in the data stream. The SIP ALG translates the P-870HN-51D’s private
IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to
use STUN or an outbound proxy if you enable the SIP ALG.
Use this screen to enable or disable the SIP (VoIP) ALG in the P-870HN-51D. To
access this screen, click NAT > ALG.
Figure 68 NAT > ALG
Each field is described in the following table.
8.7 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the P-870HN-
51D features described in this chapter.
Table 42 NAT > ALG
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active SIP ALG Select this check box to allow SIP sessions to pass through the P-
870HN-51D. SIP is a signaling protocol used in VoIP (Voice over IP), the
sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol.
Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings.
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 139
Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer
to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Please also refer to the
Supporting CD for more examples and details on port forwarding and NAT.
Port Forwarding Example
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in
the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP
address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP
addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a
single host on the Internet.
Figure 69 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
Table 43 Services and Port Numbers
SERVICES PORT NUMBER
ECHO 7
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) 21
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) 25
DNS (Domain Name System) 53
Finger 79
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web) 80
POP3 (Post Office Protocol) 110
NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) 119
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) 161
SNMP trap 162
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) 1723
D=192.168.1.36
192.168.1.1
IP address assigned by ISP
A=192.168.1.33
B=192.168.1.34
C=192.168.1.35
Chapter 8 Network Address Translation (NAT)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
140
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 141
CHAPTER 9
Firewall
9.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the P-870HN-51D firewall
settings.
The P-870HN-51D firewall is a packet filtering firewall and restricts access based
on the source/destination computer network address of a packet and the type of
application.
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The Incoming screen lets you view and configure incoming IP filtering rules
(Section 9.3 on page 142).
9.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
Basics
Computers share information over the Internet using a common language called
TCP/IP. TCP/IP, in turn, is a set of application protocols that perform specific
functions. An “extension number”, called the "TCP port" or "UDP port" identifies
these protocols, such as HTTP (Web), FTP (File Transfer Protocol), POP3 (E-mail),
etc. For example, Web traffic by default uses TCP port 80.
When computers communicate on the Internet, they are using the client/server
model, where the server "listens" on a specific TCP/UDP port for information
requests from remote client computers on the network. For example, a Web
server typically listens on port 80. Please note that while a computer may be
intended for use over a single port, such as Web on port 80, other ports are also
active. If the person configuring or managing the computer is not careful, a hacker
could attack it over an unprotected port.
Chapter 9 Firewall
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
142
Some of the most common IP ports are:
Default Filtering Policies
Filtering rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which
they apply.
The default rule for incoming traffic blocks all incoming connections from the WAN
to the LAN. If you wish to allow certain WAN users to have access to your LAN,
you will need to create custom rules to allow it.
Note: If you configure filtering rules without a good understanding of how they work,
you might inadvertently introduce security risks to the firewall and to the
protected network. Make sure you test your rules after you configure them.
These custom rules work by comparing the Source IP address, Destination IP
address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator.
Your customized rules take precedence and override the P-870HN-51D’s default
rules.
9.3 The Firewall Screen
Click Security > Firewall > Incoming to display the following screen. This
screen displays a list of the configured incoming filtering rules.
Figure 70 Firewall > Incoming
Table 44 Common IP Ports
21 FTP 53 DNS
23 Telnet 80 HTTP
25 SMTP 110 POP3
Chapter 9 Firewall
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 143
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 45 Firewall > Incoming
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Firewall Select this check box to enable the firewall on the P-870HN-51D. When
the firewall is enabled, the P-870HN-51D blocks all incoming traffic from
the WAN to the LAN. Create custome rules below to allow certain WAN
users to access your LAN or to allow traffic from the WAN to a certain
computer on the LAN.
Active Select this check box to enable the rule.
Filter Name This displays the name of the rule.
Interfaces This displays the WAN interface(s) to which this rule is applied.
Protocol This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service to
which this rule applies.
Source Address
/ Mask This displays the source IP addresses and subnet mask to which this
rule applies. Please note that a blank source address is equivalent to
Any.
Source Port This is the source port number.
Dest. Address /
Mask This displays the destination IP addresses and subnet mask to which
this rule applies. Please note that a blank destination address is
equivalent to Any.
Dest. Port This is the destination port number.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent
rules move up by one when you take this action.
Add Click Add to create a new rule.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Chapter 9 Firewall
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
144
9.3.1 Creating Incoming Firewall Rules
In the Incoming screen, click Add to display this screen and refer to the following
table for information on the labels.
Figure 71 Firewall > Incoming: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 46 Firewall > Incoming: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to enable the rule.
Filter Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 printable English keyboard
characters, including spaces.
To add a firewall rule, you need to configure at least one of the
following fields (except the Interface field).
Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP or ICMP)
and enter the protocol (service type) number in the port field. Select
NONE to apply the rule to any protocol.
Source IP
Address Enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Source Subnet
Mask Enter the source subnet mask.
Source Port Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source.
Destination IP
Address Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Destination
Subnet Mask Enter the destination subnet mask.
Destination Port Enter the port number of the destination.
Chapter 9 Firewall
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 145
Interface Select Select All to apply the rule to all interfaces on the P-870HN-
51D or select the specific WAN interface(s) to which this rule applies.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Table 46 Firewall > Incoming: Add (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 9 Firewall
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
146
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 147
CHAPTER 10
Certificate
10.1 Overview
The P-870HN-51D can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate
users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the
certificate owner’s identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange
public keys for use in authentication.
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and
import the P-870HN-51D's CA-signed certificates (Section 10.4 on page 154).
•The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the P-
870HN-51D (Section 10.4 on page 154).
10.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
Certification Authority
A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of
each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like
CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. The certification
authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the
certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the P-
870HN-51D to generate certification requests that contain identifying information
and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification
authority.
Chapter 10 Certificate
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
148
10.3 The Local Certificates Screen
Click Security > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen. This is the
P-870HN-51D’s summary list of certificates and certification requests.
Figure 72 Local Certificates
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 47 Local Certificates
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is
recommended that you give each certificate a unique name.
In Use This field displays how many applications use the certificate.
Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner,
such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department),
O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that
each certificate have unique subject information.
Type This field displays what kind of certificate this is.
request represents a certification request and is not yet a valid
certificate. Send a certification request to a certification authority, which
then issues a certificate. Use the Load Certificate screen to import the
certificate and replace the request.
signed represents a certificate issued by a certification authority.
Action Click the View button to open a screen with an in-depth list of
information about the certificate (or certification request).
Click the Load Signed button to import a valid certification to replace
the request.
Click the Remove button to delete the certificate (or certification
request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is
configured to use.
Chapter 10 Certificate
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 149
10.3.1 Create Certificate Request
Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Create Certificate
Request to open the My Certificate Create screen. Use this screen to have the
P-870HN-51D generate a certification request.
Figure 73 Create Certificate Request
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Create
Certificate
Request
Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the P-870HN-
51D generate a certification request.
Import
Certificate Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate
that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your
computer to the P-870HN-51D.
Table 47 Local Certificates (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 48 Create Certificate Request
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate Name Type up to 31 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this
certificate.
Common Name Select a radio button to identify the certificate’s owner by IP address,
domain name or e-mail address. Type the IP address (in dotted
decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field
provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 31 ASCII
characters. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification
purposes only and can be any string.
Organization Name Type up to 127 characters to identify the company or group to which
the certificate owner belongs. You may use any character, including
spaces, but the P-870HN-51D drops trailing spaces.
State/Province
Name Type up to 127 characters to identify the state or province where the
certificate owner is located. You may use any character, including
spaces, but the P-870HN-51D drops trailing spaces.
Country/Region
Name Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is
located.
Chapter 10 Certificate
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
150
After you click Apply, the Certificate Request Details screen displays. Click
Load Signed Certificate to import a certificate signed by the CA to replace the
request (see Section 10.3.4 on page 153). Otherwise, click Back to return to the
Local Certificates screen. See Section 10.3.3 on page 152 for field information.
Figure 74 Certificate Request Details
10.3.2 Import Certificate
Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Import
Certificate to open the Import Local Certificate screen. Follow the instructions
in this screen to save an existing certificate to the P-870HN-51D.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Apply Click Apply to begin certificate or certification request generation.
Table 48 Create Certificate Request (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 Certificate
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 151
Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can
import it.
Figure 75 Import Local Certificate
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 49 Import Local Certificate
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate
Name Type up to 31 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this
certificate.
Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the P-870HN-
51D.
Private
Key Copy and paste the private key into the text box to store it on the P-870HN-
51D.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the P-870HN-51D.
Chapter 10 Certificate
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
152
10.3.3 Certificate Details
Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates to open the My Certificates
screen (see Figure 72 on page 148). Click the View icon to open the Certificate
Details screen. Use this screen to view in-depth certificate information and
change the certificate’s name.
Figure 76 Certificate Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 50 Certificate Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want
to change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this
certificate. You may use any character (not including spaces).
Type This field displays general information about the certificate. signed
means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. request
means this is a certification request.
Chapter 10 Certificate
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 153
10.3.4 Load Signed Certificate
Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Load Signed or
the Load Signed Certificate button in the Certificate Details screen of a
certification request to open the Load Certificate screen. Follow the instructions
in this screen to save a valid certificate to repalce the request.
Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the
certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organization (O), State (ST)
and Country (C).
Certificate This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced
Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the
binary certificate into a printable form.
This displays null in a certification request.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to
friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a
text editor and save the file on a management computer for later
distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Private Key This read-only text box displays the private key in Privacy Enhanced
Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the
binary certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste the private key into an e-mail to send to
friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a
text editor and save the file on a management computer for later
distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Signing Request This read-only text box displays the request information in Privacy
Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to
convert the binary certificate into a printable form.
This displays null in a signed certificate.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Load Signed
Certificate This button is available only in a certification request details screen
Click this to import a certificate signed by the CA to replace the
request.
Table 50 Certificate Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 Certificate
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
154
Figure 77 Load Certificate
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
10.4 The Trusted CA Screen
Click Advanced Setup > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the following
screen. This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification
authorities that you have set the P-870HN-51D to accept as trusted. The P-
870HN-51D accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this
Table 51 Load Certificate
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate
Name This field is read-only and displays the identifying name of this certificate.
Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the P-870HN-
51D.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the P-870HN-51D.
Chapter 10 Certificate
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 155
list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is
signed by one of these certification authorities.
Figure 78 Trusted CA
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 52 Trusted CA
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.
Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the
certificate, such as Common Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or
department), Organization (O), State (ST) and Country (C). It is
recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.
Type This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means
that a Certification Authority signed the certificate.
Action Click View to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about
the certificate.
Click Remove to delete the certificate.
Import
Certificate Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of
a certification authority that you trust to the P-870HN-51D.
Chapter 10 Certificate
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
156
10.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate
Click the View button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. Use
this screen to view in-depth information about the certification authority’s
certificate.
Figure 79 Trusted CA: View
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 53 Trusted CA: View
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate.
Type This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means
that a Certification Authority signed the certificate.
Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the
certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU),
Organization (O) and Country (C).
Certificate This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced
Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary
certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends
or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text
editor and save the file on a management computer for later
distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Chapter 10 Certificate
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 157
10.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate
Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the
following screen. The P-870HN-51D trusts any valid certificate signed by any of
the imported trusted CA certificates.
Figure 80 Trusted CA: Import Certificate
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 54 Trusted CA: Import Certificate
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate Name Enter the name that identifies this certificate.
Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the P-
870HN-51D.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Chapter 10 Certificate
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
158
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 159
CHAPTER 11
Static Route
11.1 Overview
The P-870HN-51D usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from
computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the P-870HN-51D send data to
devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes.
For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the P-870HN-
51D’s LAN interface. The P-870HN-51D routes most traffic from A to the Internet
through the P-870HN-51D’s default gateway (R1). You create one static route to
connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another
static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3
connected to the LAN.
Figure 81 Example of Static Routing Topology
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The Static Route screens let you view and configure IP static routes on the P-
870HN-51D (Section 11.2 on page 160).
WAN
R1
R2
A
R3
LAN
Chapter 11 Static Route
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
160
11.2 The Static Route Screen
Click Advanced > Static Route to open the Static Route screen.
Figure 82 Advanced > Static Route
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 55 Advanced > Static Route
LABEL DESCRIPTION
#This is the number of an individual static route.
Active This field indicates whether the rule is active or not.
Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination.
Routing is always based on network number.
Netmask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final
destination.
Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch
on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The
gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.
Interface This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed.
Remove Click the icon to remove a static route from the P-870HN-51D. A window
displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route.
Add Click this to create a new rule.
Apply Click this to apply your changes to the P-870HN-51D.
Chapter 11 Static Route
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 161
11.2.1 Static Route Edit
Click the Add button in the Static Route screen. Use this screen to configure the
required information for a static route.
Figure 83 Static Route: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 56 Static Route: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Destination IP
Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination.
Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a
route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the
subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host
ID.
IP Subnet
Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here.
Use Interface Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have
the WAN interface(s) already configured in the WAN screens.
Use Gateway
IP Address Select this option and enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The
gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your P-870HN-
51D's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their
destinations.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 11 Static Route
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
162
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 163
CHAPTER 12
Policy Forwarding
12.1 Overview
Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the P-870HN-
51D takes the shortest path to forward a packet. Policy forwarding allows the P-
870HN-51D to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet
forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Policy-based
routing is applied to outgoing packets, prior to the normal routing.
You can use source-based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users
through different connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load
sharing.
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The Policy Forwarding screens let you view and configure routing policies on the
P-870HN-51D (Section 12.2 on page 163).
12.2 The Static Route Screen
Click Advanced > Policy Forwarding to open the Policy Forwarding screen.
Figure 84 Advanced > Policy Forwarding
Chapter 12 Policy Forwarding
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
164
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
12.2.1 Policy Forwarding Setup
Click the Add button in the Policy Forwarding screen. Use this screen to
configure the required information for a policy route.
Figure 85 Policy Forwarding: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 57 Advanced > Policy Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Policy Name This is the name of the rule.
SourceIP This is the source IP address.
Protocol This is the transport layer protocol.
SourcePort This is the source port number.
SourceMAC This is the source MAC address.
Interface This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed.
Remove Click the icon to remove a rule from the P-870HN-51D. A window displays
asking you to confirm that you want to delete the rule.
Add Click this to create a new rule.
Table 58 Policy Forwarding: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Policy Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 printable English keyboard
characters, including spaces.
Source IP
Address Enter the source IP address.
Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).
Source Port Enter the source port number.
Source Mac
Address Enter the source MAC address.
Use Interface Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have
the WAN interface(s) already configured in the WAN screens.
Chapter 12 Policy Forwarding
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 165
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 58 Policy Forwarding: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 12 Policy Forwarding
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
166
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 167
CHAPTER 13
RIP
13.1 Overview
Routing Information Protocol (RIP, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a device to
exchange routing information with other routers.
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The RIP screen lets you set up RIP settings on the P-870HN-51D (Section 13.2 on
page 167).
13.2 The RIP Screen
Click Advanced > RIP to open the RIP screen.
Figure 86 Advanced > RIP
Chapter 13 RIP
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
168
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 59 Advanced > RIP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface This is the name of the interface in which the RIP setting is used.
Version The RIP version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the
RIP packets that the P-870HN-51D sends (it recognizes both formats
when receiving). RIP version 1 is universally supported but RIP version 2
carries more information. RIP version 1 is probably adequate for most
networks, unless you have an unusual network topology.
Operation Select Passive to have the P-870HN-51D update the routing table based
on the RIP packets received from neighbors but not advertise its route
information to other routers in this interface.
Select Active to have the P-870HN-51D advertise its route information
and also listen for routing updates from neighboring routers.
Enabled Select the check box to activate the settings.
Apply/Save Click Apply/Save to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 169
CHAPTER 14
Quality of Service (QoS)
14.1 Overview
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network’s ability to deliver data with
minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of
bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the
network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and
make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-
demand.
Configure QoS on the P-870HN-51D to group and prioritize application traffic and
fine-tune network performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps:
1Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows.
2Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow.
The P-870HN-51D assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet
accordingly. Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than
those with low priority if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications
to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require
a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as
Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a
problem such as Internet radio or streaming video.
This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers.
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The General screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream
bandwidth (Section 14.3 on page 170).
•The Queue Setup screen lets you lets you configure QoS queue assignment
(Section 14.4 on page 172).
•The Class Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS classifiers (Section
14.5 on page 174).
•The Policer Setup screen lets you control ingress (or incoming) traffic (Section
14.6 on page 180).
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
170
•The Monitor screen lets you view the P-870HN-51D's QoS-related packet
statistics (Section 14.7 on page 183).
14.2 What You Need to Know
QoS versus CoS
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same
flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic
in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as
a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types.
CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated
Services or DS). IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet
header, while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field, which replaces
the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header.
Tagging and Marking
In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ
Code Point) value, IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched
packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking
device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service
based on the tag or marker.
14.3 The Quality of Service General Screen
Use this screen to enable or disable QoS, set the upstream bandwidth for WAN
and downsteam bandwidth for LAN/WLAN.
Upstream bandwdith refers to resources alloted to traffic, which goes from the
LAN device to the WAN device. On the other hand, downstream bandwidth refers
to resources alloted to traffic that comes back from the WAN device to the LAN
device
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 171
Click Advanced > QoS to open the screen as shown next.
Figure 87 QoS General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 60 QoS General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active QoS Select the check box to turn on QoS to improve your network
performance.
WAN Managed
Upstream
Bandwidth
Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interface that you
want to allocate using QoS.
The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interface’s actual
transmission speed. For example, set the WAN interface speed to
100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission
speed of 100 Mbps.
You can set this number higher than the interface’s actual transmission
speed. The P-870HN-51D uses up to 95% of the DSL port’s actual
upstream transmission speed even if you set this number higher than
the DSL port’s actual transmission speed.
You can also set this number lower than the interface’s actual
transmission speed. This will cause the P-870HN-51D to not use some of
the interface’s available bandwidth.
If you leave this field blank, the P-870HN-51D automatically sets this
number to be 95% of the DSL port’s actual upstream transmission
speed.
LAN/WLAN
Managed
Downstream
Bandwidth
Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN and WLAN
interfaces that you want to allocate using QoS.
This value depends on what the network adapter supports. If the
network adapter supports at least 100 Mbps, the effective value for the
field is any value between 1 Kbps to 100 Mbps. The default value is 100
Mbps.
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
172
14.4 The Queue Setup Screen
Click QoS > Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next. Use this screen to
configure QoS queue assignment.
Figure 88 QoS Queue Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Upstream
traffic priority
will be
automatically
assigned by
This field is ignored if traffic matches a class you previously configured in
the Advanced > QoS > Class Setup screen.
If traffic does not match a class configured in the Class Setup screen,
the P-870HN-51D assigns priority to unmatched traffic based on what
you select in this field: Ethernet Priority, IP Precedence and/or
Packet Length. See Section 14.8.1 on page 185 for more information
on these traffic priority schemes.
If you do not configure this field, traffic which does not match a class is
mapped to queue two.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 60 QoS General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 61 QoS Queue Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Click this button to create a new entry.
No. This is the index number of this entry.
Active Select the check box to enable the queue.
Name This shows the descriptive name of this queue.
Interface This shows the name of the P-870HN-51D’s interface through which traffic
in this queue passes.
Priority This shows the priority of this queue.
Weight This shows the weight of this queue.
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 173
14.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue
Click the Add button or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a
queue.
Figure 89 QoS Queue Setup: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Buffer
Management This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue.
Queue management algorithms determine how the P-870HN-51D should
handle packets when it receives too many (network congestion).
Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this
queue.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the queue.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent
rules move up by one when you take this action.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Table 61 QoS Queue Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 62 QoS Queue Setup: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Select to enable or disable this queue.
Name Enter the descriptive name of this queue.
Interface Select the interface to which this queue is applied.
Priority Select the priority level (from 1 to 3) of this queue.
The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to
higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority
queues is dropped if the network is congested.
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
174
14.5 The Class Setup Screen
Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into
data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination
address, source port number, destination port number or incoming interface. For
example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol
port (such as Telnet) to form a flow.
You can give different priorities to traffic that the P-870HN-51D forwards out
through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run
more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that
they do not reduce the quality of other applications.
Click QoS > Class Setup to open the following screen.
Figure 90 QoS Class Setup
Weight Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue.
If two queues have the same priority level, the P-870HN-51D divides the
bandwidth across the queues according to their weights. Queues with
larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights.
Buffer
Management This field displays Drop Tail (DT). Drop Tail (DT) is a simple queue
management algorithm that allows the P-870HN-51D buffer to accept as
many packets as it can until it is full. Once the buffer is full, new packets
that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer again (packets
are transmitted out of it).
Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on
this queue.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 62 QoS Queue Setup: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 175
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 63 QoS Class Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Click this button to create a new classifier.
Order This field displays the index number of the classifier.
Active Select the check box to enable the classifier.
Class Name This is the name of the classifier.
Classification
Criteria This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface
from which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC
address of traffic that matches this classifier.
Forward To This is the interface through which traffic that matches this classifier is
forwarded out.
DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier.
802.1P Mark This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic of this
classifier.
VLAN ID Tag This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier.
To Queue This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the
classifier.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that
subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
176
14.5.1 QoS Class Edit
Click the Add button or the Edit icon in the Class Setup screen to configure a
classifier.
Figure 91 QoS Class Setup: Add
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 177
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 64 QoS Class Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Class
Configuration
Enable Select to enable or disable this classifier.
Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 20 printable English keyboard
characters, including spaces.
Classification
Order Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to
move the classifier to the number you selected after clicking Apply.
Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list.
Forward to
Interface Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be
forwarded out. If you select Unchange, the P-870HN-51D forward
traffic of this class according to the default routing table.
DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select the Ether Type check box.
If you select Mark, enter a DSCP value with which the P-870HN-51D
replaces the DSCP field in the packets.
If you select Auto Mapping and there is a VLAN tag carried in the
matched packets, the P-870HN-51D will replace the IP ToS field with
the 802.1p priority field.
If you select Unchange, the P-870HN-51D keep the DSCP field in the
packets.
802.1p Mark Select a priority level with which the P-870HN-51D replaces the IEEE
802.1p priority field in the packets.
If you select Unchange, the P-870HN-51D keep the 802.1p priority
field in the packets.
VLAN ID Tag If you select Remark, enter a VLAN ID number (between 1 and 4095)
with which the P-870HN-51D replaces the VLAN ID of the frames.
If you select Remove, the P-870HN-51D deletes the VLAN ID of the
frames before forwarding them out.
If you select Add, the P-870HN-51D treat all matched traffic untagged
and add a second VLAN ID.
If you select Unchange, the P-870HN-51D keep the VLAN ID in the
packets.
To Queue Select a queue that applies to this class.
You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen
already.
Criteria Configuration
Use the following fields to configure the criteria for traffic classification.
Basic
From Interface Select from which Ethernet port or wireless interface traffic of this
class should come.
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
178
Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched
traffic.
If you select IP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC
address, IP address, DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type.
If you select 8021Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level and
VLAN ID in the Others section.
Source
MAC Address Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.
MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits
a packet’s MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the
traffic’s MAC address should match. Enter “0“ for the bit(s) of the
matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal
character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a
MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
IP Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted
decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP
address.
IP Subnet
Mask Enter the source subnet mask.
TCP/UDP Port
Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check
box and enter the port number(s) of the source.
Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified
criteria from this classifier.
Destination
MAC Address Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the
packet.
MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits
a packet’s MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the
traffic’s MAC address should match. Enter “0“ for the bit(s) of the
matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal
character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a
MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
IP Address Select the check box and enter the destination IP address in dotted
decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP
address.
IP Subnet
Mask Enter the destination subnet mask.
TCP/UDP Port
Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check
box and enter the port number(s) of the source.
Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified
criteria from this classifier.
Others
Table 64 QoS Class Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 179
802.1P This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type
field.
Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from
the drop down list box.
"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
VLAN ID This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type
field.
Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number between 1 and 4095.
IP Protocol This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP,
UDP, ICMP or IGMP. If you select User defined, enter the protocol
(service type) number.
IP Packet
Length This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet
length (from 28 to 1500) in the fields provided.
DSCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number
between 0 and 63 in the field provided.
TCP ACK This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the
ACK (Acknowledge) flag.
DHCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select a DHCP option.
If you select Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60), enter the Vendor
Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of
the hardware or firmware.
If you select User Class ID (DHCP Option 77), enter a string that
identifies the user’s category or application type in the matched DHCP
packets.
Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified
criteria from this classifier.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 64 QoS Class Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
180
14.6 The Policer Setup Screen
A policer is a QoS policy.
Click QoS > Policer Setup to open the following screen. The P-870HN-51D can
control ingress (or incoming) traffic by dropping packets that exceed the
committed rate and/or committed burst size specified in this screen.
Figure 92 QoS > Policer
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 65 QoS > Policer Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Click this button to create a new policy.
No This field displays the index number of the policy.
Active Select the check box to enable the policy.
Name This is the name of the policy.
Regulated
Classes This shows to which classes the policy applies.
Meter Type This shows the method that the P-870HN-51D uses for determining
which packets to pass, drop or mark (DSCP), whether it’s Simple
Token Bucket, Single Rate Three Color Meter or Two Rate Three
Color Meter. Refer to Section 14.8.2 on page 186 for information on
these meter types.
Parameter Committed Rate - This shows the maximum committed rate for the
specified class/es.
Committed Burst Size - This shows the maximum committed burst
size for the specified class/es.
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 181
14.6.1 Policer Setup Add/Edit
Figure 93 QoS > Policer: Edit
Action Conforming Action - This shows the action that the P-870HN-51D
applies to packets that conform to the meter type selected, and can
be Pass, Drop or DSCP mark.
Non Conforming Action - This shows the action that the P-870HN-
51D applies to packets that do not conform to the meter type
selected, and can be Pass, Drop or DSCP mark.
•Pass - the packet is allowed to flow to its destination.
•Drop - the packet is discarded.
•DSCP mark - the packet is given a DSCP mark and processed
accordingly. See Section 14.8.1 on page 185 for information on
DSCP mark.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the
classifier.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that
subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Table 65 QoS > Policer Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
182
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 66 QoS > Policer Setup: Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Select this to have the P-870HN-51D pass, drop or mark packets
that exceed the committed rate and/or committed burst size
specified in this screen.
Meter Type Select the method that the P-870HN-51D uses for determining which
packets to pass, drop or mark (DSCP). Choices are: Simple Token
Bucket, Single Rate Three Color Meter and Two Rate Three
Color Meter. Refer to Section 14.8.2 on page 186 for information on
these meter types.
Committed
Rate Enter the maximum committed rate for the specified class/es.
Committed
Burst Size Enter the maximum committed burst size for the specified class/es.
Conforming
Action Select the action that the P-870HN-51D applies to packets that
conform to the meter type selected. Choices are Pass, Drop and
DSCP mark.
•Pass - the packet is allowed to flow to its destination.
•Drop - the packet is discarded.
•DSCP mark - the packet is given a DSCP mark and processed
accordingly. See Section 14.8.1 on page 185 for information on
DSCP mark.
Non-
comforming
Action
Select the action that the P-870HN-51D applies to packets that do not
conform to the meter type selected. Choices are Pass, Drop and
DSCP mark.
•Pass - the packet is allowed to flow to its destination.
•Drop - the packet is discarded.
•DSCP mark - the packet is given a DSCP mark and processed
accordingly. See Section 14.8.1 on page 185 for information on
DSCP mark.
Regularted
Classes Member
Setting
Use the Add and Remove buttons to select or deselect classes to
which the policy applies.
Available Class This shows the available classes.
Selected Class This shows classes to which the policy applies.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 183
14.7 The QoS Monitor Screen
To view the P-870HN-51D’s QoS packet statistics, click Advanced > QoS >
Monitor. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 94 QoS > Monitor
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 67 QoS > Monitor
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Enter how often you want the P-870HN-51D to update this screen.
Select No Refresh to stop refreshing statistics.
Interface Monitor
No. This is the index number of the entry.
Name This shows the name of the WAN interface on the P-870HN-51D.
Pass This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are
transmitted successfully.
Drop This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are
dropped.
Queue Monitor
No. This is the index number of the entry.
Name This shows the name of the queue.
Pass This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are transmitted
successfully.
Drop This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are dropped.
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
184
14.8 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the P-870HN-
51D features described in this chapter.
IEEE 802.1Q Tag
The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to
identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the
12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a
specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame
across the network.
IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic
types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d
standard (which incorporates the 802.1p).
DiffServ
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow
are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different
priorities to different packet types.
DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks
packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant
network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow.
Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of
Table 68 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type
PRIORITY
LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE
Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration
messages.
Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the
variations in delay).
Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to
jitter.
Level 4 Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA
(Systems Network Architecture) transactions.
Level 3 Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would
include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Level 2 This is for “spare bandwidth”.
Level 1 This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk
transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and
users.
Level 0 Typically used for best-effort traffic.
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 185
service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices
to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to
negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition,
applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of
where the traffic is going.
DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of
Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and
a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure
illustrates the DS field.
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so
that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the
DSCP mapping.
The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior),
that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule,
different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources
can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies.
14.8.1 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment
If you enable QoS on the P-870HN-51D, the P-870HN-51D can automatically base
on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign
priority to traffic which does not match a class.
The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on
the P-870HN-51D. On the P-870HN-51D, traffic assigned to higher priority queues
gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is
congested.
DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits)
Table 69 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping
PRIORITY
QUEUE
LAYER 2 LAYER 3
IEEE 802.1P
USER PRIORITY
(ETHERNET
PRIORITY)
TOS (IP
PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET
LENGTH (BYTE)
0 1 0 000000
12
2 0 0 000000 >1100
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
186
14.8.2 Traffic Policing Meter Types
Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of
traffic on the basis of user-defined criteria. Traffic policing methods measure traffic
flows against user-defined criteria and identify it as either conforming, exceeding
or violating the criteria.
Simple Token Bucket is similar to tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can
be transmitted. The bucket is a buffer that temporarily stores outgoing packets
and transmits them at an average rate.
Single Rate Three Color Marker (SRTCM) and Two Rate Three Color Marker
(TRTCM) evaluate incoming packets and mark them with one of three colors which
3 3 1 001110
001100
001010
001000
250~1100
4 4 2 010110
010100
010010
010000
5 5 3 011110
011100
011010
011000
<250
6 6 4 100110
100100
100010
100000
5 101110
101000
7 7 6 110000
111000
7
Table 69 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping
PRIORITY
QUEUE
LAYER 2 LAYER 3
IEEE 802.1P
USER PRIORITY
(ETHERNET
PRIORITY)
TOS (IP
PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET
LENGTH (BYTE)
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 187
refer to packet loss priority (PLP) levels. High PLP level is referred to as red,
medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green. The difference
between the two meters is the types of parameters used to evaluate packets.
SRTCM uses committed information rate (CIR), the committed burst size and the
excess burst size. TRTCM uses peak information rate (PIR), CIR, peak burst size
and a committed burst size. After SRTCM and TRTCM are configured and DiffServ
is enabled the following actions are performed on the colored packets:
• Red (high loss priority level) packets are dropped.
• Yellow (medium loss priority level) packets are dropped if there is congestion on
the network.
• Green (low loss priority level) packets are forwarded.
Chapter 14 Quality of Service (QoS)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
188
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 189
CHAPTER 15
Dynamic DNS Setup
15.1 Overview
Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or
many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-
SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own
computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a
name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that
changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to
call you even if they don't know your IP address.
First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with
www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP
server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service
provider will give you a password or key.
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
Use the Dynamic DNS screen (Section 15.3 on page 190) to enable DDNS and
configure the DDNS settings on the P-870HN-51D.
15.2 What You Need To Know
DYNDNS Wildcard
Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be
aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if
you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach
your hostname.
If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.
Chapter 15 Dynamic DNS Setup
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
190
15.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen
To change your P-870HN-51D’s DDNS, click Advanced > Dynamic DNS. The
screen appears as shown.
Figure 95 Advanced > Dynamic DNS
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 70 Advanced > Dynamic DNS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Service
Provider Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider.
Host Name Type the domain name assigned to your P-870HN-51D by your Dynamic
DNS provider.
You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma
(",").
Interface Select the WAN interface to use for updating the IP address of the
domain name.
User Name Type your user name.
Password Type the password assigned to you.
Email Enter the user name you used to register for this service.
Key Enter the password you used to register for this service.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 191
CHAPTER 16
Remote Management
16.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the remote management and access
control settings on the P-870HN-51D.
16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The TR-069 screen lets you configure the P-870HN-51D’s TR-069 auto-
configuration settings (Section 16.3 on page 193).
•The TR-064 screen lets you enable management via TR-064 on the P-870HN-
51D (Section 16.3 on page 193).
•The Service Control screens let you configure through which interface(s) users
can use which service(s) to manage the P-870HN-51D (Section 16.4 on page
194).
•The IP Address screens let you configure from which IP address(es) users can
use a service to manage the P-870HN-51D (Section 16.5 on page 195).
16.2 The TR-069 Screen
TR-069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment (CPE), for example your P-
870HN-51D, can be managed over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server
(ACS). TR-069 is based on sending Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs) between an
ACS and a client device. RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup Language (XML)
format over HTTP or HTTPS.
An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the P-870HN-51D, modify
settings, perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the P-
870HN-51D. You have to enable the device to be managed by the ACS and specify
the ACS IP address or domain name and username and password.
Chapter 16 Remote Management
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
192
Click Advanced > Remote MGMT to open the following screen. Use this screen
to configure your P-870HN-51D to be managed by an ACS.
Figure 96 TR-069
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 71 TR-069
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Inform Select Enable to activate remote management via TR-069 on the
WAN. Otherwise, select Disable.
Inform Interval Enter the time interval (in seconds) at which the P-870HN-51D sends
information to the auto-configuration server.
ACS URL Enter the URL or IP address of the auto-configuration server.
ACS User Name Enter the TR-069 user name for authentication with the auto-
configuration server.
ACS Password Enter the TR-069 password for authentication with the auto-
configuration server.
WAN Interface
used by TR-069
client
Select a WAN interface through which the TR-069 traffic passes.
If you select Multi_WAN, you should also select the pre-configured
WAN connection(s).
Display SOAP
messages on
serial console
Select Enable to show the SOAP messages on the console.
Connection
Request
Authentication
Select this option to enable authentication when there is a connection
request from the ACS.
Connection
Request User
Name
Enter the connection request user name.
When the ACS makes a connection request to the P-870HN-51D, this
user name is used to authenticate the ACS.
Chapter 16 Remote Management
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 193
16.3 The TR-064 Screen
TR-064 is a LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum.
TR-064 is built on top of UPnP. It allows the users to use a TR-064 compliant CPE
management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and
configure user-specific parameters, such as the username and password.
Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > TR064 to open the following screen.
Figure 97 TR-064
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Connection
Request
Password
Enter the connection request password.
When the ACS makes a connection request to the P-870HN-51D, this
password is used to authenticate the ACS.
Connection
Request URL This shows the connection request URL.
The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the P-
870HN-51D.
Apply/Save Click this button to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 71 TR-069 (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 72 TR-064
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable TR064 Select the check box to activate management via TR-064 on the LAN.
Enable
Authenticator Some TR-064 commands require authentication before it can be
executed. Select this to have the P-870HN-51D authenticate the user
before running the command.
Deselect this to disable authentication and have the P-870HN-51D run
all commands.
Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Chapter 16 Remote Management
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
194
16.4 The Service Control Screen
Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > Service Control to open the following
screen. Use this screen to decide what services you may use to access which P-
870HN-51D interface.
Figure 98 Service Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 73 Access Control: Services
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Service Control Select Enable to turn on service control. Otherwise, select Disable.
# This is the index number of the entry.
Services This is the service you may use to access the P-870HN-51D.
LAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you
want to allow access to the P-870HN-51D from the LAN.
WAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you
want to allow access to the P-870HN-51D from the WAN.
Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Chapter 16 Remote Management
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 195
16.5 The IP Address Screen
Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > IP Address to open the following screen.
Use this screen to specify the “trusted” computers from which an administrator
may use a service to manage the P-870HN-51D.
Figure 99 IP Address
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 74 IP Address
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Access Control
Mode Select Enable to activate the secured client list. Select Disable to
disable the list without deleting it.
IP Address This is the IP address of the trusted computer from which you can
manage the P-870HN-51D.
Remove Select this check box and click the Remove button to delete this entry
from the P-870HN-51D.
Add Click this button to create a new entry.
Remove Click this button to delete the selected entry.
Chapter 16 Remote Management
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
196
16.5.1 Adding an IP Address
Click the Add button in the IP Address screen to open the following screen.
Figure 100 IP Address: Add
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 75 IP Address: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IP Address Enter the IP address of the trusted computer from which you can
manage the P-870HN-51D.
Apply/Save Click this button to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving.
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 197
CHAPTER 17
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
17.1 Overview
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that
uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A
UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its
capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can
leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.
17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The UPnP screen lets you enable UPnP on the P-870HN-51D (Section 17.3 on
page 198).
17.2 What You Need to Know
How do I know if I'm using UPnP?
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder
(Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear
as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the
information and properties of that device.
NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate
through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network
addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and
enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows
the following:
• Dynamic port mapping
• Learning public IP addresses
• Assigning lease times to mappings
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
198
Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal
and UPnP.
See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT.
Cautions with UPnP
The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own
services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network
information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some
network environments.
When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast
message. For security reasons, the P-870HN-51D allows multicast messages on
the LAN only.
All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without
additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.
UPnP and ZyXEL
ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum
UPnP™ Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports
Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0.
See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP.
17.3 The UPnP Screen
Click Advanced > UPnP to display the screen shown next.
See Section 17.1 on page 197 for more information.
Figure 101 Advanced > UPnP
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 199
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
17.4 Installing UPnP in Windows Example
This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP.
Installing UPnP in Windows Me
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me.
1Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.
2Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the
Components selection box. Click Details.
Figure 102 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication
Table 76 Advanced > UPnP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Universal Plug
and Play (UPnP) Feature Select this check box to enable UPnP. Be aware that anyone
could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's
login screen without entering the P-870HN-51D's IP address
(although you must still enter the password to access the web
configurator).
Apply/Save Click this to save the setting to the P-870HN-51D.
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
200
3In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box
in the Components selection box.
Figure 103 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components
4Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click
Next.
5Restart the computer when prompted.
Installing UPnP in Windows XP
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP.
1Click Start and Control Panel.
2Double-click Network Connections.
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 201
3In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and
select Optional Networking Components ….
Figure 104 Network Connections
4The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays.
Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details.
Figure 105 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
202
5In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check
box.
Figure 106 Networking Services
6Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard
window and click Next.
17.5 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example
This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must
already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the P-870HN-
51D.
Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the P-870HN-51D. Turn on
your computer and the P-870HN-51D.
Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device
1Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon
displays under Internet Gateway.
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 203
2Right-click the icon and select Properties.
Figure 107 Network Connections
3In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port
mappings there were automatically created.
Figure 108 Internet Connection Properties
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
204
4You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port
mappings.
Figure 109 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings
Figure 110 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add
5When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port
mappings will be deleted automatically.
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 205
6Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK.
An icon displays in the system tray.
Figure 111 System Tray Icon
7Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status.
Figure 112 Internet Connection Status
Web Configurator Easy Access
With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the P-870HN-51D
without finding out the IP address of the P-870HN-51D first. This comes helpful if
you do not know the IP address of the P-870HN-51D.
Follow the steps below to access the web configurator.
1Click Start and then Control Panel.
2Double-click Network Connections.
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
206
3Select My Network Places under Other Places.
Figure 113 Network Connections
4An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local
Network.
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 207
5Right-click on the icon for your P-870HN-51D and select Invoke. The web
configurator login screen displays.
Figure 114 Network Connections: My Network Places
6Right-click on the icon for your P-870HN-51D and select Properties. A properties
window displays with basic information about the P-870HN-51D.
Figure 115 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
208
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 209
CHAPTER 18
Parental Control
18.1 Overview
Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL. You can also
define time periods and days during which the P-870HN-51D performs parental
control on a specific user.
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Time Restriction screen lets you give different time restrictions to each
user of your network (Section 18.2 on page 209).
•The URL Filter screen lets you restrict home network users from viewing
inappropriate websites (Section 18.3 on page 211).
18.2 The Time Restriction Screen
Use this screen to view the schedules and enable parental control on a specific
user during certain periods.
Click Advanced Setup > Parental Control to open the following screen.
Figure 116 Parental Control > Time restriction
Chapter 18 Parental Control
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
210
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
18.2.1 Adding a Schedule
Click the Add button in the Time Restriction screen to open the following
screen. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule for a specific user
on your network.
Figure 117 Time Restriction Configuration
Table 77 Parental Control > Time Restriction
LABEL DESCRIPTION
#This shows the index number of the schedule.
Active Select the check box to enable the schedule.
username This shows the name of the user.
MAC This shows the MAC address of the LAN user’s computer to which this
schedule applies.
Mon ~ Sun x indicates the day(s) on which parental control is enabled.
Start This shows the time when the schedule starts.
Stop This shows the time when the schedule ends.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the
schedule.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing schedule.
Add Click Add to create a new schedule.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Chapter 18 Parental Control
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 211
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
18.3 The URL Filter Screen
Use this screen to configure URL filtering settings to allow or block the users on
your network from accessing certian web sites.
Click Advanced Setup > Parental Control > URL Filter to open the following
screen.
Figure 118 Parental Control > URL Filter
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 78 Time Restriction Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Name Enter the name of the user.
MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the LAN user’s computer to which this
schedule applies.
Days of the week Select check boxes for the days that you want the P-870HN-51D to
perform parental control.
Start Blocking
Time
End Blocking
Time
Enter the time period of each day, in 24-hour format, during which
parental control will be enforced.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any
changes.
Save/Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the P-870HN-51D.
Table 79 Parental Control > URL Filter
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable URL Filter Select the check box to enable URL filtering on the P-870HN-51D.
# This is the index number of the rule.
Chapter 18 Parental Control
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
212
18.3.1 Adding URL Filter
Click the Add button in the URL Filter screen to open the following screen.
Figure 119 URL Filter Configuration
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Active Select the check box to enable the filtering rule.
Address This is the URL of the web site in this rule.
Port This is the port number the web server uses to forward HTTP traffic.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing rule.
Add Click Add to create a new rule.
Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the P-870HN-51D.
Table 79 Parental Control > URL Filter (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 80 URL Filter Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
URL Address Enter the URL of web site to which the P-870HN-51D blocks or allows
access.
Port Number Specify the port number the web server uses to forward HTTP traffic.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any
changes.
Save/Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the P-870HN-51D.
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 213
CHAPTER 19
Interface Group
19.1 Overview
By default, all LAN and WAN interfaces on the P-870HN-51D are in the same
group and can communicate with each other. You can create multiple groups to
have the P-870HN-51D assign the IP addresses in different domains to different
groups. Each group acts as an independent network on the P-870HN-51D.
19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The Interface Group screen lets you create multiple networks on the P-870HN-
51D (Section 19.2 on page 213).
19.2 The Interface Group Screen
You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group. Alternatively, you can have
the P-870HN-51D automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on
which traffic is received to the new group when its source MAC address or DHCP
option information matches the predefined filtering criteria.
Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP server on the
P-870HN-51D assigns to the clients in the default and/or user-defined groups. If
you set the P-870HN-51D to assign IP addresses based on the client’s source MAC
address or DHCP option information, you must enable DHCP server and configure
LAN TCP/IP settings for both the default and user-defined groups. See Chapter 6
on page 91 for more information.
Chapter 19 Interface Group
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
214
In the following example, the client that sends packets with the source MAC
address 00:19:cb:01:23:45 is assigned the IP address 192.168.2.2 and uses the
WAN interface ptm0_2.
Figure 120 Interface Grouping Application
Click Advanced Setup > Interface Group to open the following screen.
Figure 121 Interface Group
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 81 Interface Grouping
LABEL DESCRIPTION
#This shows the index number of the entry.
Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the group.
WAN Interface This shows the WAN interfaces in the group.
LAN Interfaces This shows the LAN interfaces in the group.
Criteria This shows the filtering criteria for the goup.
Remove Click the Remove icon to delete the group.
Add Click this button to create a new group.
G2:00:19:cb:01:23:45
Default: ETH 2~4
192.168.1.x/24
192.168.2.x/24
ptm0_2
ptm0_1
Chapter 19 Interface Group
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 215
19.2.1 Interface Group Configuration
Click the Add button in the Interface Group screen to open the following screen.
Use this screen to create a new interface group.
Note: An interface can belong to a group only.
Figure 122 Interface Group Configuration
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 82 Interface Group Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Group Name Enter a name to identify this group.
WAN Interfaces
used in the
grouping
Select a WAN interface to be used in this group.
Select None to not add a WAN interface to this group.
Grouped LAN
Interfaces
Available LAN
Interfaces
Select a LAN or wireless LAN interface in the Available LAN
Interfaces and use the left-facing arrow to move it to the Grouped
LAN Interfaces to add the interface to this group.
To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Grouped LAN
Interfaces, use the righ-facing arrow.
#This shows the index number of the rule.
Filter Criteria This shows the filtering criteria. The LAN interface on which the
matched traffic is received will belong to this group automatically.
Chapter 19 Interface Group
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
216
19.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria
Click the Add button in the Interface Grouping Configuration screen to open
the following screen.
Figure 123 Interface Grouping Criteria
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Remove Click the Remove icon to delete this rule from the P-870HN-51D.
Add Click this button to create a new rule.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any
changes.
Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the P-870HN-51D.
Table 82 Interface Group Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 83 Interface Grouping Criteria
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Source MAC
Address Enter the source MAC address of the packet.
DHCP Option 60 Select this option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of
the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware.
DHCP Option 61 Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic.
IAID Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the device, for
example, the WAN connection index number.
Chapter 19 Interface Group
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 217
DUID Type Select DUID-LLT (DUID Based on Link-layer Address Plus Time) to
enter the hardware type, a time value and the MAC address of the
device.
Select DUID-EN (DUID Assigned by Vendor Based upon Enterprise
Number) to enter the vendor’s registered enterprise number.
Select DUID-LL (DUID Based on Link-layer Address) to enter the
device’s hardware type and hardware address (MAC address) in the
following fields.
Select Other to enter any string that identifies the device in the DUID
field.
Hardware
type Enter the 16-bit hardware type of the device from which the traffic
comes. For example, Ethernet is 1 and Experimental Ethernet is 2.
Time Enter the time (in seconds since midnight (UTC), January 1, 2000) the
DUID is generated.
Link-layer
address Enter the MAC address of the device.
Enterprise
number Enter the vendor’s 32-bit enterprise number registered with the IANA
(Internet Assigned Numbers Authority).
Identifier Enter a unique identifier assigned by the vendor.
DUID Enter the DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) of the device.
DHCP Option 125 Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched
traffic.
Enterprise
number Enter the vendor’s 32-bit enterprise number registered with the IANA
(Internet Assigned Numbers Authority).
Manufacturer
OUI Specify the vendor’s OUI (Organization Unique Identifier). It is usually
the first three bytes of the MAC address.
Product Class Enter the product class of the device.
Model Name Enter the model name of the device.
Serial
Number Enter the serial number of the device.
Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any
changes.
Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the P-870HN-51D.
Table 83 Interface Grouping Criteria (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 Interface Group
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
218
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 219
CHAPTER 20
System Settings
20.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system
time, password, name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval.
20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The General screen lets you configure system settings (Section 20.2 on page
219).
•The Time Setting screen lets you set the system time (Section 20.3 on page
220).
20.2 The General Screen
Use the General screen to configure system settings such as the system
password.
Click Maintenance > System to open the General screen.
Figure 124 Maintenance > System > General
Chapter 20 System Settings
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
220
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
20.3 The Time Setting Screen
To change your P-870HN-51D’s time and date, click Maintenance > System >
Time Setting. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the P-
870HN-51D’s time based on your local time zone.
Figure 125 Maintenance > System > Time Setting
Table 84 Maintenance > System > Genera
LABEL DESCRIPTION
UserName Type the user name you use to access the system.
Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the
system in this field.
New Password Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you
type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type.
After you change the password, use the new password to access the P-
870HN-51D.
Retype to
Confirm Type the new password again for confirmation.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 20 System Settings
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 221
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 85 Maintenance > System > Time Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current Time
Current Time This field displays the time of your P-870HN-51D.
Each time you reload this page, the P-870HN-51D synchronizes the
time with the time server.
Current Date This field displays the date of your P-870HN-51D.
Each time you reload this page, the P-870HN-51D synchronizes the
date with the time server.
Time and Date
Setup
Manual Select this option to enter the time and date manually.
Get from Time
Server Select this option to have the P-870HN-51D get the time and date from
the time server you specified below.
First NTP time
server
Second NTP
time server
Third NTP time
server
Fourth NTP time
server
Fifth NTP time
server
Select an NTP time server from the drop-down list box.
Otherwise, select Other and enter the IP address or URL (up to 20
extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server.
Select None if you don’t want to configure the time server.
Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this
information.
Time zone offset Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference
between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 20 System Settings
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
222
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 223
CHAPTER 21
Logs
21.1 Overview
This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and
viewing the P-870HN-51D’s logs.
The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or
alerts to have the P-870HN-51D log and then display the logs or have the P-
870HN-51D send them to a syslog server.
21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The View Log screen lets you see the logs for the categories that you selected
in the Log Settings screen (Section 21.2 on page 223).
•The Log Settings screen lets you configure to where the P-870HN-51D is to
send logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the P-870HN-51D is to record
(Section 21.3 on page 224).
21.2 The View Log Screen
Click Maintenance > Logs to open the View Log screen. Use the View Log
screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings
screen (see Section 21.3 on page 224).
Chapter 21 Logs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
224
The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills.
Figure 126 Maintenance > Logs > View Log
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
21.3 The Log Settings Screen
Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the P-870HN-51D is to send
logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the P-870HN-51D is to record and
display.
Table 86 Maintenance > Logs > View Log
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Display Select a severity level of logs to view. The P-870HN-51D displays the logs
with the severity level equal to or higher than what you selected.
#This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.
Date/Time This field displays the time the log was recorded.
Severity This field displays the severity level of the log.
System This field displays the system module from which the logs come.
Message This field states the reason for the log.
Chapter 21 Logs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 225
To change your P-870HN-51D’s log settings, click Maintenance > Logs > Log
Settings. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 127 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 87 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select to enable or disable system logging.
Log Level Select the severity level of the logs that you want the P-870HN-51D to
display, record and send to the log server.
The P-870HN-51D displays and records the logs with the severity level
equal to or higher than what you selected.
Mode Select Local to record the logs and store them in the local memory of the
P-870HN-51D only.
Select Remote to send logs to the specified log server.
Select Both to record the logs and store them in the local memory and
also send logs to the log server.
Syslog Server
IP Address Enter the server name or the IP address of the log server.
Syslog Server
UDP Port Enter the UDP port of the log server.
Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings.
Chapter 21 Logs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
226
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 227
CHAPTER 22
Tools
Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may
PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your P-870HN-51D.
22.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to upload new firmware, manage configuration files and
restart your P-870HN-51D.
Use the instructions in this chapter to change the device’s configuration file or
upgrade its firmware. After you configure your device, you can backup the
configuration file to a computer. That way if you later misconfigure the device, you
can upload the backed up configuration file to return to your previous settings.
You can alternately upload the factory default configuration file if you want to
return the device to the original default settings. The firmware determines the
device’s available features and functionality. You can download new firmware
releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade
your device’s performance.
Only use firmware for your device’s specific model. Refer to the
label on the bottom of your P-870HN-51D.
22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The Firmware screen lets you upload firmware to your device (Section 22.2 on
page 228).
•The Configuration screen lets you backup and restore device configurations
(Section 22.3 on page 230). You can also reset your device settings back to the
factory default.
•The Restart screen lets you restart your P-870HN-51D (Section 22.4 on page
232).
Chapter 22 Tools
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
228
22.2 The Firmware Screen
Click Maintenance > Tools to open the Firmware screen. Follow the
instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your P-870HN-51D. The upload
process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes.
After a successful upload, the system will reboot.
Do NOT turn off the P-870HN-51D while firmware upload is in
progress!
Figure 128 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 88 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current
Firmware
Version
This is the present Firmware version and the date created.
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click
Browse ... to find it.
Browse... Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that
you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload
them.
Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to
two minutes.
Chapter 22 Tools
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 229
After you see the Firmware Upload in Progress screen, wait two minutes
before logging into the P-870HN-51D again.
Figure 129 Firmware Upload In Progress
The P-870HN-51D automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network
disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your
desktop.
Figure 130 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the
Status screen.
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Tools to
go back to the Firmware screen.
Figure 131 Error Message
Chapter 22 Tools
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
230
22.3 The Configuration Screen
Click Maintenance > Tools > Configuration. Information related to factory
defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen,
as shown next.
Figure 132 Maintenance > Tools > Configuration
Backup Configuration
Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the P-870HN-51D’s current
configuration to a file on your computer. Once your P-870HN-51D is configured
and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your
configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration
file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.
Click Backup to save the P-870HN-51D’s current configuration to your computer.
Restore Configuration
Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved
configuration file from your computer to your P-870HN-51D.
Table 89 Restore Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click
Browse ... to find it.
Chapter 22 Tools
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 231
Do not turn off the P-870HN-51D while configuration file upload is
in progress.
After you see a “restore configuration successful” screen, you must then wait one
minute before logging into the P-870HN-51D again.
Figure 133 Configuration Upload Successful
The P-870HN-51D automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network
disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your
desktop.
Figure 134 Network Temporarily Disconnected
If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP
address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP
address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix B on page 269 for details on how to set up
your computer’s IP address.
Browse... Click Browse... to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must
decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process.
Table 89 Restore Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 22 Tools
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
232
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Tools >
Configuration to go back to the Configuration screen.
Figure 135 Configuration Upload Error
Reset to Factory Defaults
Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and
return the P-870HN-51D to its factory defaults. The following warning screen
appears.
Figure 136 Reset Warning Message
You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory
defaults of your P-870HN-51D. Refer to Section 1.6 on page 25 for more
information on the RESET button.
22.4 The Restart Screen
System restart allows you to reboot the P-870HN-51D without turning the power
off.
Chapter 22 Tools
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 233
Click Maintenance > Tools > Restart. Click Restart to have the P-870HN-51D
reboot. This does not affect the P-870HN-51D's configuration.
Figure 137 Maintenance > Tools >Restart
Chapter 22 Tools
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
234
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 235
CHAPTER 23
Diagnostic
23.1 Overview
The Diagnostic screens display information to help you identify problems with the
P-870HN-51D.
The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches
owned by independent organizations. A connectivity fault point generally takes
time to discover and impacts subscriber’s network access. In order to eliminate
the management and maintenance efforts, IEEE 802.1ag is a Connectivity Fault
Management (CFM) specification which allows network administrators to identify
and manage connection faults. Through discovery and verification of the path,
CFM can detect, analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs.
23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
•The General screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route packets take
to a host (Section 23.3 on page 236).
•The 802.1ag screen lets you perform CFM actions (Section 23.4 on page 237).
23.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
How CFM Works
A Maintenance Association (MA) defines a VLAN and associated Maintenance End
Point (MEP) ports on the device under a Maintenance Domain (MD) level. An MEP
port has the ability to send Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) and get other
MEP ports information from neighbor devices’ CCMs within an MA.
CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults.
Chapter 23 Diagnostic
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
236
• Loopback test - checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response (LBR)
from its target after it sends the Loop Back Message (LBM). If no response is
received, there might be a connectivity fault between them.
• Link trace test - provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more
information on where the fault is. If an MEP port does not respond to the source
MEP, this may indicate a fault. Administrators can take further action to check
and resume services from the fault according to the line connectivity status
report.
23.3 The General Diagnostic Screen
Click Maintenance > Diagnostic to open the screen shown next. Ping and
traceroute help check availability of remote hosts and also help troubleshoot
network or Internet connections.
Figure 138 Maintenance > Diagnostic > General
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 90 Maintenance > Diagnostic > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
TCP/IP
Address Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a
connection or trace the route packets take to.
Ping Click this button to ping the IP address that you entered.
Traceoute Click this button to perform the traceroute function. This determines the
path a packet takes to the specified host.
Chapter 23 Diagnostic
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 237
23.4 The 802.1ag Screen
Click Diagnostic to open the following screen. Use this screen to perform CFM
actions.
Figure 139 802.1ag
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 91 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag
LABEL DESCRIPTION
802.1ag
Connectivity
Fault
Management
Maintenance
Domain (MD)
Name
Type a name of up to 39 printable English keyboard characters for this
MD.
The combined length of the MD Name and MA name must be less or
equal to 44bytes.
Maintenance
Domain (MD)
Level
Select a level (0-7) under which you want to create an MA.
Maintenance
Association (MA)
Name
Type a name of up to 39 printable English keyboard characters for this
MA.
The combined length of the MD Name and MA name must be less or
equal to 44bytes.
Chapter 23 Diagnostic
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
238
Maintenance
Association (MA)
Format
Select the format which the P-870HN-51D uses to send this MA
information in the domain (MD). Options are VID, String and
Integer.
If you select VID or Integer, the P-870HN-51D adds the VLAN ID you
specified for an MA in the CCM.
If you select String, the P-870HN-51D adds the MA name you
specified above in the CCM.
Note: The MEPs in the same MA shoule use the same MA format.
Destination MAC
Address Enter the target device’s MAC address to which the P-870HN-51D
performs a CFM loopback test.
Count Set how many times the P-870HN-51D send loopback messages
(LBMs).
802.1Q VLAN ID Type a VLAN ID (0-4095) for this MA.
Maintenance End
Point ID Enter an ID number (1-8191) for this MEP port. Each MEP port needs a
unique ID number within an MD. The MEP ID is to identify an MEP port
used when you perform a CFM action
Status
Continuity Check
Message (CCM) This shows how many Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) are sent
and if there is any invalid CCM or cross-connect CCM.
Loopback
Message (LBM) This shows how many Loop Back Messages (LBMs) are sent and if
there is any inorder or outorder Loop Back Response (LBR) received
from a remote MEP.
Linktrace
Message (LTM) This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response
(LTR).
Save Click this to save your changes back to the P-870HN-51D.
Enable CCM Click this button to have the selected MEP send Connectivity Check
Messages (CCMs) to other MEPs.
Disable CCM Click this button to disallow the selected MEP to send Connectivity
Check Messages (CCMs) to other MEPs.
Update CC status Click this button to reload the test result.
Send Loopback Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM (Loop Back
Message) to a specified remote end point.
Send Linktrace Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs (Link Trace
Messages) to a specified remote end point.
Table 91 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 239
CHAPTER 24
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The
potential problems are divided into the following categories.
•Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
•P-870HN-51D Access and Login
•Internet Access
•Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
24.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The P-870HN-51D does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
1Make sure the P-870HN-51D is turned on.
2Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the P-870HN-
51D.
3Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the P-870HN-51D and
plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned
on.
4Turn the P-870HN-51D off and on.
5If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
1Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on
page 23.
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
240
2Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide.
3Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged
cables.
4Turn the P-870HN-51D off and on.
5If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
24.2 P-870HN-51D Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the P-870HN-51D.
1The default IP address is https://192.168.1.1.
2If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address
of the P-870HN-51D by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your
computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd,
and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP
address of the P-870HN-51D (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address
in your Internet browser.
3If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See
Section 1.6 on page 25.
I forgot the password.
1The default admin password is 1234 and the default user password is user.
2If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See
Section 1.6 on page 25.
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
1Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address is https://192.168.1.1.
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 241
• If you changed the IP address (Section on page 96), use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting
suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the P-870HN-51D.
2Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as
expected. See the Quick Start Guide.
3Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has
JavaScripts and Java enabled. See Appendix C on page 299.
4Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the P-870HN-51D with
the default IP address. See Section 1.6 on page 25.
5If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one
of the advanced suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a
computer that is connected to an ETHERNET port.
• Try to access the P-870HN-51D using another service, such as Telnet. If you can
access the P-870HN-51D, check the remote management settings and firewall
rules to find out why the P-870HN-51D does not respond to HTTPS.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the P-870HN-51D.
1Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default
admin user name is admin and default admin password is 1234. The default user
name is user and the default user password is user. These fields are case-
sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
2Turn the P-870HN-51D off and on.
3If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See
Section 24.1 on page 239.
I cannot Telnet to the P-870HN-51D.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in
the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
242
I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to
upload new firmware.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in
the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
I cannot access the P-870HN-51D again after configuring a new interface group.
Make sure your computer is connected to a LAN port in the default group.
Otherwise, you need to use the P-870HN-51D’s LAN IP address for the new group
to access the P-870HN-51D again.
24.3 Internet Access
I cannot access the Internet.
1Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as
expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 23.
2Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the WAN screens.
These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
3If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings
in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP.
4Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick
Start Guide again.
5If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
I cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection.
1Check if you set the DSL/WAN switch (on the back of the P-2812HNU-51c) to the
DSL side to have the P-870HN-51D use the DSL port for Internet access.
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 243
2Make sure you configured a proper ATM or PTM layer-2 interface and WAN services
with the Internet account information provided by your ISP.
3If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the
DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly
from your ISP’s DHCP server.
I cannot access the Internet through an Ethernet WAN connection.
1Check if you set the DSL/WAN switch (on the back of the P-2812HNU-51c) to the
WAN side to have the P-870HN-51D use the Ethernet WAN port for Internet
access.
2Make sure you connect the Ethernet WAN port to a DSL modem or router in your
netwrok.
3Make sure you configured a proper Ethernet layer-2 interface and WAN services
with the Internet account information provided by your ISP.
4If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the
DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly
from your ISP’s DHCP server.
I cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection.
ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time. You can only use one
type of DSL connection, either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time.
I cannot create multiple connections of the same type.
Your layer-2 interface must be in VLAN MUX Mode or MSC mode to create multiple
WAN serivces for each connection.
I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the P-
870HN-51D), but my Internet connection is not available anymore.
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
244
1Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as
expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 23.
2Turn the P-870HN-51D off and on.
3If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
The Internet connection is slow or intermittent.
1There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section
1.5 on page 23. If the P-870HN-51D is sending or receiving a lot of information,
try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer
applications.
2Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving your computer
closer to the P-870HN-51D if possible, and look around to see if there are any
devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (for example,
microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on).
3Turn the P-870HN-51D off and on.
4If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one
of the advanced suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it
is enabled, you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some
applications.
24.4 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
I cannot access the P-870HN-51D or ping any computer from the WLAN (wireless
AP or router).
1Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the P-870HN-51D.
2Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly.
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 245
3Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802.11
compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the P-870HN-51D.
4Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the
transmission range of the P-870HN-51D.
5Check that both the P-870HN-51D and your wireless station are using the same
wireless and wireless security settings.
6Check if MAC Filter is configured to deny wireless access to certain MAC addresses
to the P-870HN-51D. See Chapter 7 Wireless LAN in the User’s Guide for more
information.
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
246
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 247
CHAPTER 25
Product Specifications
The following tables summarize the P-870HN-51D’s hardware and firmware
features.
25.1 Hardware Specifications
25.2 Firmware Specifications
Table 92 Hardware Specifications
Dimensions 21.5 cm (L) x 12.3 cm (W) x 3.6 cm (D)
Weight 417 g
Power Specification 12 V DC 1.5A
Built-in Switch Four auto-negotiating, auto MDI/MDI-X 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45
Ethernet ports
RESET Button 10 seconds: Restores factory defaults
Antennas One attached external dipole antenna, 2dBi
One internal antenna , 2dBi
WPS Button 1 second: turn on or off WLAN
5 seconds: enable WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
Operation
Temperature 0º C ~ 40º C
Storage Temperature -30º ~ 60º C
Operation Humidity 20% ~ 85% RH
Storage Humidity 20% ~ 90% RH
Table 93 Firmware Specifications
Default IP Address 192.168.1.1
Default Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 (24 bits)
Chapter 25 Product Specifications
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
248
Default User Name admin
Default Password 1234
DHCP Server IP Pool 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.65
Static Routes 16
Device Management Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of
features on the P-870HN-51D.
Wireless
Functionality
(wireless devices
only)
Allow the IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11n
wireless clients to connect to the P-870HN-51D wirelessly. Enable
wireless security (WEP, WPA(2), WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering
to protect your wireless network.
Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware (when available) from the ZyXEL web site
and use the web configurator to put it on the P-870HN-51D.
Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!
Configuration Backup
& Restoration Make a copy of the P-870HN-51D’s configuration. You can put it
back on the P-870HN-51D later if you decide to revert back to an
earlier configuration.
Port Forwarding If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your
network, you can use this feature to let people access it from the
Internet.
DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration
Protocol)
Use this feature to have the P-870HN-51D assign IP addresses, an
IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your
network. Your device can also act as a surrogate DHCP server
(DHCP Relay) where it relays IP address assignment from the
actual real DHCP server to the clients.
Dynamic DNS
Support With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use
a fixed URL, www.zyxel.com for example, with a dynamic IP
address. You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS
service provider.
IP Multicast IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of
computers. The P-870HN-51D supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP
(Internet Group Management Protocol) used to join multicast
groups (see RFC 2236).
NAT NAT (includes multi-to-multi NAT)/SUA
NAT Server (port forwarding)
VPN (IPSec, PPTP, and L2TP) Pass Through
NAT friendly applications:
NetMeeting
Microsoft PPTP client
MSN Messenger
X-Box Live
TFTP, FTP, H.323, RTSP, SIP ALG
Time and Date Get the current time and date from an external server when you
turn on your P-870HN-51D. You can also set the time manually.
These dates and times are then used in logs.
Logs Use logs for troubleshooting. You can send logs from the P-
870HN-51D to an external syslog server.
Table 93 Firmware Specifications (continued)
Chapter 25 Product Specifications
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 249
Universal Plug and
Play (UPnP) A UPnP-enabled device can dynamically join a network, obtain an
IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the
network.
QoS (Quality of
Service) You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving
bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to
particular computers.
Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service (HTTPS or FTP traffic
for example) from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for
example) can access the P-870HN-51D.
PPPoE Support
(RFC2516) PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) emulates a dial-up
connection. It allows your ISP to use their existing network
configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL.
The PPPoE driver on your device is transparent to the computers
on the LAN, which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE
thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual
computers.
Other PPPoE Features PPPoE idle time out
PPPoE dial on demand
Packet Filters Your device’s packet filtering function allows added network
security and management.
VDSL Standards Maximum data rate (downstream/upstream): 100 Mbps/100 Mbps
VDSL line coding: ITU-T G.993.2 DMT modulation
Tranceivers: ITU-T G.993.1
DSL handshake procedure protocol: ITU-T G.994.1
DSL physical layer management protocol: ITU-T G.997.1
VDSL band plan: 997 and 998
Support U0 band
VDSL profiles: 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b, 17a and 30a
VDSL speed: up to 100/100 Mbps@ 700 feet
Support Annex A, Annex B
Rate adaptation
OLR: Bit Swapping/ SRA (Seamless Rate Adaption)
Upstream power back-off (UPBO)
VDSL OAM communication channels: Indicator bits (IB) channel,
VDSL embedded operations channel (EOC) and VDSL overhead
control channel (VOC)
Erasure and Broadcom PhyR PHY Level Retransmission Technology
PTM mode
Trellis coding
INP capability: At least two symbols protection (INP_MIN = 2), up
to 16 symbols (INP_MIN = 16)
Table 93 Firmware Specifications (continued)
Chapter 25 Product Specifications
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
250
The following list, which is not exhaustive, illustrates the standards supported in
the P-870HN-51D.
Other Protocol
Support PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) link layer protocol
Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols
RIP I/RIP II
ICMP
ATM QoS
SNMP v1 and v2c with MIB II support (RFC 1213)
IP Multicasting IGMP v1 and v2
IGMP Proxy
Management Embedded Web Configurator
Remote Firmware Upgrade
Telnet
Embedded FTP/TFTP Server for firmware upgrade and
configuration file backup and restore
CLI (Command Line Interpreter)
SSH (Secure Shell function)
Syslog
TR-069
TR-064
Table 94 Standards Supported
STANDARD DESCRIPTION
RFC 1058 RIP-1 (Routing Information Protocol)
RFC 1112 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 1 IGMP v1
RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol (NTP version 3)
RFC 1631 IP Network Address Translator (NAT)
RFC 1661 The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
RFC 1723 RIP-2 (Routing Information Protocol)
RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2 IGMP v2
RFC 2516 A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet (PPPoE)
RFC 2766 Network Address Translation - Protocol
IEEE 802.11 Also known by the brand Wi-Fi, denotes a set of Wireless LAN/
WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE
LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).
IEEE 802.11b Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band
IEEE 802.11g Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band
IEEE 802.11n Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band
Table 93 Firmware Specifications (continued)
Chapter 25 Product Specifications
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 251
IEEE 802.11d Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Media
Access Control (MAC) Bridges
IEEE 802.11x Port Based Network Access Control.
IEEE 802.11e QoS IEEE 802.11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service
ITU-T G.993.2
(VDSL2) ITU standard that defines VDSL2.
TR-069 DSL Forum Standard for CPE Wan Management.
TR-064 DSL Forum LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration
Table 94 Standards Supported (continued)
STANDARD DESCRIPTION
Chapter 25 Product Specifications
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
252
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 253
APPENDIX A
Network Troubleshooting
Overview
The three most basic utilities for troubleshooting network connection issues are:
ipconfig, ping and tracert. This appendix gives a quick overview of them as
well as some common usage examples. Moreover, three slightly more advanced
utilities are also discussed: arp, route, and netstat.
Note: All command examples here use the Microsoft Windows operating system
version of the commands.
Before Getting Started
Before using the commands described in this section, ensure that you have the
TCP/IP networking component installed and properly configured for your network
adapter.
Click Start > Control Panel > Network Connections and then open a Local
Area Connection to display the following screen.
Figure 140 TCP/IP Networking Component
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
254
Note: Most operating systems ship with TCP/IP already installed and enabled. See
your Windows documentation for details on installing or configuring TCP/IP.
The Command Line Interface
To open the Windows command line interface:
1Click Start > Run.
2In the Run dialog box, enter cmd then click OK.
3The Command Prompt window opens.
Command Syntax and Parameters
Command descriptions always indicate the default syntax you must use when
entering them on the command line. Some commands require additional
parameters in order to execute properly. Some may have optional parameters.
Parameters are displayed as follows: command [parameter]
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 255
For example, the date command has the optional /t and date parameters. If
you do not use either of them and enter just date by itself, then the system
shows you the date it is currently using and then prompts you to change it.
However, if you use the /t parameter it just displays the date and nothing more.
To view the parameters for any given command, enter help [command].
ipconfig
The ipconfig command line utility allows you to display current network (TCP/IP)
configuration settings and, in some cases, adjust them. When you have network
connectivity problems, the first thing you should do is run this command to ensure
that your device or computer does in fact have an IP address as well as display the
source of that IP address (such as a default gateway).
Syntax: ipconfig
Parameters: ipconfig [/release] [/renew]
There are other parameters, but these are the only ones you need to use for now.
The following examples show the typical output of this command:
C:\>date
The current date is: 2009/10/21
Enter the new date: (mm-dd-yy)
C:\>date /t
2009/10/21
C:\>
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . : example.com
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.1.1
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 1.1.1.4
C:\>
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
256
Here you can see that the device has IP address of 1.1.1.1 and example.com is its
Domain Name Server (DNS).
If the device is disconnected then you would see the following instead:
If the device is connected but cannot get an IP address then you would see:
In some cases, your computer may be properly connected to the network or the P-
870HN-51D but it is not receiving an IP address for whatever reason. Use the /
release parameter followed by /renew:
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Media State . . . . . . . . . . . : Media disconnected
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
C:\>ipconfig /release
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
C:\>ipconfig /renew
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . : zyxel.com
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.1.2
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 2.2.2.4
C:\>
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 257
ping
The ping command line utility allows you to verify the connection and latency
between your computer and either the P-870HN-51D or other devices on the
network. If you cannot reach a target using this command, then it may indicate
possible network trouble.
Syntax: ping target
The target can be an IP address or a host name.
Parameters: ping [-w timeout] target
The timeout parameter allows you to input the number of seconds (in
milliseconds) that your computer waits for a reply.
The following examples show the typical output of this command:
The number of bytes here indicates packet size. As most data is broken up into
smaller packets, this makes the ping test fairly representative of a typical network
connection. The default packet size on Windows is 32 bytes.
Time is the number of milliseconds the data requires to make the roundtrip
journey from your computer to the destination host and back again. The lower the
number, the faster the connection between the two points.
Note: Some hosts are deliberately configured to not respond to ping requests. As
such, we suggest pinging two or three hosts when performing your ping test.
C:\>ping www.zyxel.com
Pinging a1524.g.akamai.net [203.69.113.18] with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 203.69.113.18: bytes=32 time=6ms TTL=56
Reply from 203.69.113.18: bytes=32 time=6ms TTL=56
Reply from 203.69.113.18: bytes=32 time=6ms TTL=56
Reply from 203.69.113.18: bytes=32 time=7ms TTL=48
Ping statistics for 203.69.113.18:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 6ms, Maximum = 7ms, Average = 6ms
>
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
258
If your ping test fails to get a response, then you may see a message like this:
When a request times out it may mean:
• your computer is not connected to the network
• your Internet access device is not connected to the network
• or the device which you are pinging is not connected to the network
If you think the destination is active but responding slowly, you can try increasing
the ping timeout value from its default of 4 seconds (4000 milliseconds) to
something like 8 seconds (or 8000 milliseconds).
A long ping response could indicate network problems:
• on your side of the connection
• between the start and end points of the connection
• on the receiving end
To determine where the slowdown is, you may need to use traceroute.
C:\>ping www.example.com
Pinging www.example.com [192.0.32.10] with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Ping statistics for 192.0.32.10:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
C:\>
C:\>ping -w 8000 www.example.com
Pinging www.example.com [192.0.32.10] with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.0.32.10: bytes=32 time=157ms TTL=238
Reply from 192.0.32.10: bytes=32 time=154ms TTL=238
Reply from 192.0.32.10: bytes=32 time=152ms TTL=236
Reply from 192.0.32.10: bytes=32 time=162ms TTL=236
Ping statistics for 192.0.32.10:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 152ms, Maximum = 162ms, Average = 156ms
C:\>
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 259
tracert
The tracert command line utility allows you to determine the network path
between your computer and a host you specify. When you communicate with
other devices on a network, the data is not often sent directly from point A to
point B; rather, it moves through a series of intermediate servers, passed along
until eventually the server closest to point B hands it off directly. This command
can be useful for helping determine whether your connection issues are happening
locally, somewhere in transit, or at the destination end.
• Each step in the chain of connections is called a ‘hop’.
• The time it takes for a server at any given hop to pass the data packet is called
‘latency’ and is measured in milliseconds.
When a tracert command is run, it sends out a burst of three data packets per
hop. The results table, therefore, always displays three values for latency in
addition to the IP address and domain name (where available) of the server on
that leg of the journey.
Syntax: tracert target
The target can be an IP address or a host name.
Parameters: tracert [-d] [-h maximumhops ] target
There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now.
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
260
The following examples show the typical output of this command:
Here, the tracert to www.example.com took 18 hops to reach its destination.
Looking at the latency data, you’ll see the first slow down happens at hop 10.
The extremely low latency on the first few hops indicates a network local to the
computer where the tracert command originated, such as a home or office LAN.
The packets then move onto the local WAN (such as your Internet Service
Provider’s network). Because of the close proximity of those servers to your
computer, the latency remains low.
Once the data packets move out of the regional network to the first international
server (at hop 10 in this example), the latency increases. This is because of the
distance between the regional and international servers - it physically takes longer
for the response to get back to your computer.
Finally, on transition hop 15 from the server in Japan to the server in California,
another latency spike occurs. If you were having connection problems, this would
most likely be the source of it. For whatever reason, the server in Japan has a less
than optimal connection with its counterpart in the United States.
C:\>tracert www.example.com
Tracing route to www.example.com [192.0.32.10]
over a maximum of 30 hops:
1 <1 ms <1 ms <1 ms 172.23.x.x
2 5 ms 4 ms 5 ms 172.23.x.x
3 4 ms 4 ms 4 ms 172.23.x.x
4 5 ms 4 ms 6 ms 219-87-158-97.static.tfn.tw [219.87.158.97]
5 6 ms 5 ms 4 ms 10.42.232.150
6 5 ms 4 ms 4 ms hc-c12r2.router.tw [220.128.7.86]
7 10 ms 7 ms 10 ms tp-s2-c12r12.router.tw [220.128.2.90]
8 9 ms 7 ms 8 ms pr03-s2.tp.tw [220.128.4.181]
9 6 ms 6 ms 9 ms 220-128-3-249.NET-IP.tw [220.128.3.249]
10 138 ms 137 ms 138 ms r11-pa.NET-IP.net [211.72.108.129]
11 138 ms 138 ms 138 ms po4-0.core01.sjc04.atlas.com [154.54.11.129]
12 128 ms 139 ms 140 ms te9-2.mpd01.sjc04.atlas.com [154.54.0.173]
13 140 ms 139 ms 136 ms 61.58.33.173
14 154 ms 153 ms 137 ms xe-0-0-0.r20.gin.ntt.net [129.250.16.161]
15 154 ms 154 ms 137 ms as-2.r21.tokyjp01.jp.ntt.net [129.250.4.81]
16 562 ms 553 ms 553 ms 38.106.6.34
17 554 ms 554 ms 553 ms po-2.r00.lsanca19.us.ntt.net [129.250.6.42]
18 254 ms 254 ms 248 ms 204.1.254.150
19 154 ms 253 ms 154 ms 192.0.32.10
Trace complete.
C:\>
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 261
In this example, we abridge the tracert results table to show only server IP
addresses and not domain names by using the -d parameter. We also use the -h
parameter to limit the number of hops to 5 to test local connections only.
arp
Local network transmission is based on MAC addresses. Data transmission
between two networks is based on IP addresses.
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol that converts IP addresses into
MAC addresses. Before a computer transmits data to an IP address on the same
network, it will check whether the IP address exists in its ARP table. If it does, the
computer then sends the data directly to the mapped MAC address. If it does not,
the computer broadcasts an ARP request to the network. The host whose MAC
address maps to the IP address responds.
When you use ping to check the connection to a computer, no response does not
mean the computer is not alive on the network. The destination computer may be
configured not to respond to any ping requests. However, you can use the arp -a
command line utility to check the IP addresses and MAC addresses of your
neighboring computers or devices.
Syntax: arp -a
Parameters: arp [-d inet_addr] [-s inet_addr eth_addr]
The -d parameter can be use alone to remove all entries from an arp table or in
conjunction with an IP address to remove just that IP address (inet_addr). The -
s parameter allows you to add entries based on IP address (inet_addr) and/or
MAC address (eth_addr).
There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now.
C:\>tracert -d -h 5 www.zyxel.com
Tracing route to a1524.g.akamai.net [203.69.113.16]
over a maximum of 5 hops:
1 <1 ms <1 ms <1 ms 172.23.31.254
2 5 ms 4 ms 4 ms 172.23.6.113
3 5 ms 5 ms 6 ms 172.23.6.253
4 17 ms 16 ms 14 ms 218.160.188.254
5 24 ms 25 ms 24 ms 10.42.232.150
Trace complete.
C:\>
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
262
To check the ARP table on a Windows XP computer:
1Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. The Command
Prompt screen appears.
2Type arp -a and press [Enter].
The following examples show the typical output of this command:
In this example, the Physical Address indicates the associated MAC address. A
Type entry with dynamic means it was dynamically learned through an ARP
response. Use the arp -s [inet_addr eth_addr] to manually add an ARP entry
if you want your computer to connect to the host with the specified MAC address
when you access the specified IP address.
You can additionally check whether the MAC address associated with the IP
address that you are looking for is correct. In some circumstances, your ARP table
may keep a wrong MAC address until the entry expires. You can then manually
update the ARP table.
To update the ARP table:
1Type arp -d [inet_addr] or just use arp -d to remove all entries in the ARP
table. For example, type arp -d 172.16.1.5.
2Type ping 172.16.1.5 and press [Enter].
3Next, use the arp -a command again to check whether the MAC address matches
what you expected. If it does not, another computer may be using a duplicate IP
address on the network. Change the IP address on either computer to an unused
one to fix this problem.
route
The route command line utility allows you to display or adjust your computer’s
network table. The routing table on your computer contains the default gateway
C:\>arp -a
Interface: 172.16.1.28 on Interface 0x1000003
Internet Address Physical Address Type
172.16.1.5 00-00-aa-19-07-38 dynamic
172.16.1.25 00-18-f3-f0-aa-34 dynamic
172.16.1.44 00-0e-a6-2c-60-10 dynamic
172.16.1.210 00-19-cb-e9-66-33 dynamic
172.16.1.254 00-04-80-4c-a8-05 dynamic
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 263
and other route information. When your computer wants to access an IP address
on another network, it references this table.
Syntax: route print
Parameters: For the purposes of this section, the print parameter is the most
important. If you enter route by itself, the command’s help page displays.
The following example shows the typical output of this command:
The following table describes labels shown in the command output:
C:\>route print
===========================================================================
Interface List
0x1 ........................... MS TCP Loopback interface
0x1000003 ...00 02 e3 a1 b2 c3 ...... Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet
Driver
===========================================================================
===========================================================================
Active Routes:
Network Destination Netmask Gateway Interface Metric
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.1.254 172.16.1.32 1
127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1
172.16.1.0 255.255.255.0 172.16.1.32 172.16.1.32 1
172.16.1.32 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1
172.16.255.255 255.255.255.255 172.16.1.32 172.16.1.32 1
224.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 172.16.1.32 172.16.1.32 1
255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 172.16.1.32 172.16.1.32 1
Default Gateway: 172.16.1.254
===========================================================================
Persistent Routes:
None
Table 95 route print Command Output
OUTPUT DESCRIPTION
Active Routes This section lists all available routes that are automatically
learned from the network.
Network Destination The destination IP address of packets that this route entry is to
route. The destination can be an IP address for a network or host,
0.0.0.0 for the default route or 127.0.0.0 for the loopback
interface which is used mainly for self-test.
The destination 224.0.0.0 is for multicasting packets or reserved
for testing. But if you are not using multicast applications, just
ignore it.
The destination 255.255.255.255 is used to find computers when
an IP address is not known. For example, before the DHCP IP
address of your computer is determined, your computer sends
packets with the destination looking for DHCP servers on the
network.
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
264
In this example, the 172.16.1.0 is the network address. The 172.16.1.32 is the
address of the local computer. 172.16.1.255 is the network broadcast address
which sends broadcast packets to all computers on the 172.16.1.x network.
172.16.1.254 is the default gateway.
You may have more than one 0.0.0.0 entry if your computer has two or more
network cards installed. This may casue packets to be routed somewhere
unexpected. Delete all 0.0.0.0 entries except the one that you want to use for the
default gateway. In the following example, the computer uses the first 0.0.0.0
entry for the default gateway.
• To delete the route to the default route with the gateway of 192.168.1.254,
type: route delete 0.0.0.0 mask 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.254.
• To add a route to the destination 172.16.2.0 with the subnet mask of
255.255.255.0, the next hop address of 172.16.1.250, and the cost metric of 7,
type: route add 172.16.2.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.16.1.250 metric 7.
• To add a persistent route to the destination 172.16.3.0 with the subnet mask of
255.255.255.0 and the next hop address of 172.16.1.252, type: route -p add
172.16.3.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.16.1.252.
Note that the metric will be set to 1 if you do not specify any.
Netmask The destination subnet mask of packets that this route entry is to
route. The subnet mask can be the apropriate subnet mask for a
network, 255.255.255.255 for a host, or 0.0.0.0 for the default
route.
Gateway The IP address of the gateway through which this computer
should send the matched packets.
Interface The IP address of an physical interface on this computer used to
send the matched packets for this route entry.
Metric The metric (hop count) of this route. Normally, the lower the
number, the faster to a destination.
Default Gateway The IP address of the gateway through which this computer sends
all the rest packets if this computer cannot find any other
matched routes for the packets.
Persistent Routes This section lists all routes that are manually configured.
Network Destination Netmask Gateway Interface Metric
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.254 192.168.1.33 1
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.1.254 172.16.1.32 1
Table 95 route print Command Output
OUTPUT DESCRIPTION
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 265
netstat
The netstat command line utility is used to show Ethernet statistics and current
TCP/IP network connections.
Syntax: netstat
With no parameters, this command simply displays only active statistics for ports
that are currently in use by one process or another.
Parameter: netstat [-a] [-e]
The -a parameter displays all available listening ports and connections whether
they are active or not, while the -e parameter displays Ethernet statistics.
There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now.
The following examples show the typical output of this command:
C:\>netstat
Active Connections
Proto Local Address Foreign Address State
TCP COMPUTERA:1056 localhost:5091 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:1091 localhost:27015 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:1120 localhost:40000 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:3243 localhost:3244 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:3244 localhost:3243 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:3246 localhost:3247 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:3247 localhost:3246 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:5091 localhost:1056 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:5152 localhost:3245 CLOSE_WAIT
TCP COMPUTERA:27015 localhost:1091 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:40000 localhost:1120 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:3229 172.20.0.201:http CLOSE_WAIT
TCP COMPUTERA:3234 172.16.1.29:1155 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:3237 172.16.1.29:1155 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:3240 172.16.1.29:1155 ESTABLISHED
C:\>
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
266
Use the -a parameter to display all possible connections to your device, not just
the ones that are currently in use:
The following table describes the three entries in the output example above:
C:\>netstat -a
Active Connections
Proto Local Address Foreign Address State
TCP COMPUTERA:http COMPUTERA:0 LISTENING
TCP COMPUTERA:http 172.16.x.x:4036 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:2744 NAS:microsoft-ds ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:5152 172.16.x.x.ZyXEL.com:0 LISTENING
TCP COMPUTERA:5152 localhost:4067 CLOSE_WAIT
TCP COMPUTERA:5354 172.16.x.x.ZyXEL.com:0 LISTENING
TCP COMPUTERA:27015 172.16.x.x.ZyXEL.com:0 LISTENING
TCP COMPUTERA:40000 localhost:0 LISTENING
TCP COMPUTERA:40000 localhost:1120 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:netbios-ssn 172.16.x.x.ZyXEL.com:0 LISTENING
TCP COMPUTERA:4177 172.16.x.x:1155 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:4178 172.16.x.x:1155 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:4180 172.16.x.x:1155 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:4182 172.16.x.x:1025 ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:4317 NAS:microsoft-ds ESTABLISHED
TCP COMPUTERA:4539 NAS:microsoft-ds TIME_WAIT
TCP COMPUTERA:netbios-ssn 172.16.x.x:0 LISTENING
TCP COMPUTERA:netbios-ssn 172.16.x.x:0 LISTENING
C:\>
Table 96 netstat -a Command Output
OUTPUT DESCRIPTION
TCP
COMPUTERA:http
COMPUTERA:0
LISTENING
A web server is available on COMPUTERA as an HTTP
service is in a LISTENING state.
TCP
COMPUTERA:http
172.16.1.29:4036
ESTABLISHED
A computer with an IP address of 172.16.1.29 is accessing
the web service on the COMPUTERA.
TCP
COMPUTERA:2744
NAS:microsoft-ds
ESTABLISHED
COMPUTERA has established a TCP/IP NETBIOS
connection (microsoft-ds) with a NAS device.
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 267
Additionally, you can use netstat -e to display Ethernet statistics as the following
example.
C:\ >netstat -e
Interface Statistics
Received Sent
Bytes 25250033 7060325
Unicast packets 38838 34744
Non-unicast packets 38227 175
Discards 0 0
Errors 0 35
Unknown protocols 787
Appendix A Network Troubleshooting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
268
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 269
APPENDIX B
Setting Up Your Computer’s IP
Address
Note: Your specific P-870HN-51D may not support all of the operating systems
described in this appendix. See the product specifications for more information
about which operating systems are supported.
This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in
order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network.
Windows Vista/XP/2000, Mac OS 9/OS X, and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include
the software components you need to use TCP/IP on your computer.
If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP, make sure
that your network’s computers have IP addresses that place them in the same
subnet.
In this appendix, you can set up an IP address for:
•Windows XP/NT/2000 on page 269
•Windows Vista on page 273
•Windows 7 on page 277
•Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4 on page 281
•Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6 on page 285
•Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) on page 288
•Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE) on page 293
Windows XP/NT/2000
The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also
apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
270
1Click Start > Control Panel.
Figure 141 Windows XP: Start Menu
2In the Control Panel, click the Network Connections icon.
Figure 142 Windows XP: Control Panel
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 271
3Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties.
Figure 143 Windows XP: Control Panel > Network Connections > Properties
4On the General tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and then click
Properties.
Figure 144 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
272
5The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens.
Figure 145 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
6Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP
assigns your IP address dynamically.
Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask,
and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to
you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred
DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided.
7Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
8Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
Verifying Settings
1Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 273
2In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER].
You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a
network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP
address and connection information.
Windows Vista
This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional.
1Click Start > Control Panel.
Figure 146 Windows Vista: Start Menu
2In the Control Panel, click the Network and Internet icon.
Figure 147 Windows Vista: Control Panel
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
274
3Click the Network and Sharing Center icon.
Figure 148 Windows Vista: Network And Internet
4Click Manage network connections.
Figure 149 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center
5Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties.
Figure 150 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center
Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen
saying that it needs your permission to continue.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 275
6Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties.
Figure 151 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
276
7The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens.
Figure 152 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
8Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP
assigns your IP address dynamically.
Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask,
and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to
you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred
DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was
provided.Click Advanced.
9Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
Verifying Settings
1Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 277
2In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER].
You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a
network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP
address and connection information.
Windows 7
This section shows screens from Windows 7 Enterprise.
1Click Start > Control Panel.
Figure 153 Windows 7: Start Menu
2In the Control Panel, click View network status and tasks under the
Network and Internet category.
Figure 154 Windows 7: Control Panel
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
278
3Click Change adapter settings.
Figure 155 Windows 7: Network And Sharing Center
4Double click Local Area Connection and then select Properties.
Figure 156 Windows 7: Local Area Connection Status
Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen
saying that it needs your permission to continue.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 279
5Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties.
Figure 157 Windows 7: Local Area Connection Properties
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
280
6The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens.
Figure 158 Windows 7: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
7Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP
assigns your IP address dynamically.
Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask,
and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to
you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred
DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided.
Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced settings for IP, DNS and WINS.
8Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
9Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
Verifying Settings
1Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
2In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER].
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 281
3The IP settings are displayed as follows.
Figure 159 Windows 7: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4
The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.4 but can also apply to 10.3.
1Click Apple > System Preferences.
Figure 160 Mac OS X 10.4: Apple Menu
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
282
2In the System Preferences window, click the Network icon.
Figure 161 Mac OS X 10.4: System Preferences
3When the Network preferences pane opens, select Built-in Ethernet from the
network connection type list, and then click Configure.
Figure 162 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 283
4For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4
list in the TCP/IP tab.
Figure 163 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences > TCP/IP Tab.
5For statically assigned settings, do the following:
•From the Configure IPv4 list, select Manually.
•In the IP Address field, type your IP address.
•In the Subnet Mask field, type your subnet mask.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
284
•In the Router field, type the IP address of your device.
Figure 164 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences > Ethernet
6Click Apply Now and close the window.
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network
Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network Interface from the Info
tab.
Figure 165 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Utility
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 285
Mac OS X: 10.5 and 10.6
The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.5 but can also apply to 10.6.
1Click Apple > System Preferences.
Figure 166 Mac OS X 10.5: Apple Menu
2In System Preferences, click the Network icon.
Figure 167 Mac OS X 10.5: Systems Preferences
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
286
3When the Network preferences pane opens, select Ethernet from the list of
available connection types.
Figure 168 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Preferences > Ethernet
4From the Configure list, select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings.
5For statically assigned settings, do the following:
•From the Configure list, select Manually.
•In the IP Address field, enter your IP address.
•In the Subnet Mask field, enter your subnet mask.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 287
•In the Router field, enter the IP address of your P-870HN-51D.
Figure 169 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Preferences > Ethernet
6Click Apply and close the window.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
288
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network
Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info
tab.
Figure 170 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Utility
Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME)
This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in the
GNU Object Model Environment (GNOME) using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution.
The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific
distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens
use the default Ubuntu 8 installation.
Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.
Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME:
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 289
1Click System > Administration > Network.
Figure 171 Ubuntu 8: System > Administration Menu
2When the Network Settings window opens, click Unlock to open the
Authenticate window. (By default, the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked.)
You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin
password.
Figure 172 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Connections
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
290
3In the Authenticate window, enter your admin account name and password then
click the Authenticate button.
Figure 173 Ubuntu 8: Administrator Account Authentication
4In the Network Settings window, select the connection that you want to
configure, then click Properties.
Figure 174 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Connections
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 291
5The Properties dialog box opens.
Figure 175 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Properties
•In the Configuration list, select Automatic Configuration (DHCP) if you
have a dynamic IP address.
•In the Configuration list, select Static IP address if you have a static IP
address. Fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway address fields.
6Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to
the Network Settings screen.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
292
7If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network
Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields
provided.
Figure 176 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > DNS
8Click the Close button to apply the changes.
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking System > Administration > Network
Tools, and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 293
tab. The Interface Statistics column shows data if your connection is working
properly.
Figure 177 Ubuntu 8: Network Tools
Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE)
This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in the K
Desktop Environment (KDE) using the openSUSE 10.3 Linux distribution. The
procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific
distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens
use the default openSUSE 10.3 installation.
Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.
Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE:
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
294
1Click K Menu > Computer > Administrator Settings (YaST).
Figure 178 openSUSE 10.3: K Menu > Computer Menu
2When the Run as Root - KDE su dialog opens, enter the admin password and
click OK.
Figure 179 openSUSE 10.3: K Menu > Computer Menu
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 295
3When the YaST Control Center window opens, select Network Devices and
then click the Network Card icon.
Figure 180 openSUSE 10.3: YaST Control Center
4When the Network Settings window opens, click the Overview tab, select the
appropriate connection Name from the list, and then click the Configure button.
Figure 181 openSUSE 10.3: Network Settings
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
296
5When the Network Card Setup window opens, click the Address tab
Figure 182 openSUSE 10.3: Network Card Setup
6Select Dynamic Address (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address.
Select Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the
IP address, Subnet mask, and Hostname fields.
7Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window.
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 297
8If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the Hostname/DNS tab in
Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields
provided.
Figure 183 openSUSE 10.3: Network Settings
9Click Finish to save your settings and close the window.
Verifying Settings
Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP/IP
properties. From the Options sub-menu, select Show Connection Information.
Figure 184 openSUSE 10.3: KNetwork Manager
Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
298
When the Connection Status - KNetwork Manager window opens, click the
Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly.
Figure 185 openSUSE: Connection Status - KNetwork Manager
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 299
APPENDIX C
Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts
and Java Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer
versions may vary.
Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers
You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device.
Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service
Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP
address.
Disable Pop-up Blockers
1In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off
Pop-up Blocker.
Figure 186 Pop-up Blocker
You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in
the Privacy tab.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
300
1In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy.
2Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen.
This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled.
Figure 187 Internet Options: Privacy
3Click Apply to save this setting.
Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions
Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the
following steps.
1In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 301
2Select Settings…to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.
Figure 188 Internet Options: Privacy
3Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have
blocked) with the prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.1.1.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
302
4Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites.
Figure 189 Pop-up Blocker Settings
5Click Close to return to the Privacy screen.
6Click Apply to save this setting.
JavaScripts
If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check
that JavaScripts are allowed.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 303
1In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Figure 190 Internet Options: Security
2Click the Custom Level... button.
3Scroll down to Scripting.
4Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
5Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the
default).
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
304
6Click OK to close the window.
Figure 191 Security Settings - Java Scripting
Java Permissions
1From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security
tab.
2Click the Custom Level... button.
3Scroll down to Microsoft VM.
4Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 305
5Click OK to close the window.
Figure 192 Security Settings - Java
JAVA (Sun)
1From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced
tab.
2Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected.
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
306
3Click OK to close the window.
Figure 193 Java (Sun)
Mozilla Firefox
Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary.
You can enable Java, Javascripts and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then
click Options in the screen that appears.
Figure 194 Mozilla Firefox: Tools > Options
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 307
Click Content.to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the
following screen.
Figure 195 Mozilla Firefox Content Security
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
308
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 309
APPENDIX D
IP Addresses and Subnetting
This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks.
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device
(including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to
communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as
hosts.
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network.
You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
Introduction to IP Addresses
One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host
ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the
hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house
has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique
identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets
to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network
the packets are delivered.
Structure
An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for
example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is
an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal
notation).
Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or
0 to 255 in decimal.
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
310
The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets
(192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID.
Figure 196 Network Number and Host ID
How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID
varies according to the subnet mask.
Subnet Masks
A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number,
and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term
“subnet” is short for “sub-network”.
A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a “1” then the
corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the
subnet mask is “0” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host
ID.
The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in
bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal).
Table 97 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example
1ST
OCTET:
(192)
2ND
OCTET:
(168)
3RD
OCTET:
(1)
4TH
OCTET
(2)
IP Address (Binary) 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000
Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001
Host ID 00000010
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 311
By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones
beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of
zeros, for a total number of 32 bits.
Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits
with a “1” value). For example, an “8-bit mask” means that the first 8 bits of the
mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes.
Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The
following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit
and 29-bit subnet masks.
Network Size
The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible
hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number
bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits.
An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network
(192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host
IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a
24-bit subnet mask, for example).
As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the
maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:
Table 98 Subnet Masks
BINARY
DECIMAL
1ST
OCTET 2ND
OCTET 3RD
OCTET 4TH
OCTET
8-bit mask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255.0.0.0
16-bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255.255.0.0
24-bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255.255.255.0
29-bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255.255.255.248
Table 99 Maximum Host Numbers
SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF
HOSTS
8 bits 255.0.0.0 24 bits 224 – 2 16777214
16 bits 255.255.0.0 16 bits 216 – 2 65534
24 bits 255.255.255.0 8 bits 28 – 2 254
29 bits 255.255.255.248 3 bits 23 – 2 6
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
312
Notation
Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left,
followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask,
you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each
octet. This is usually specified by writing a “/” followed by the number of bits in
the mask after the address.
For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask
255.255.255.128.
The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations.
Subnetting
You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the
following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a
group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons.
In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three
octets of the address (192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining
octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 28 – 2 or 254 possible hosts.
Table 100 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation
SUBNET MASK ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION LAST OCTET
(BINARY) LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.0 /24 0000 0000 0
255.255.255.128 /25 1000 0000 128
255.255.255.192 /26 1100 0000 192
255.255.255.224 /27 1110 0000 224
255.255.255.240 /28 1111 0000 240
255.255.255.248 /29 1111 1000 248
255.255.255.252 /30 1111 1100 252
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 313
The following figure shows the company network before subnetting.
Figure 197 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting
You can “borrow” one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into
two separate sub-networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or
/25).
The “borrowed” host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two
subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25.
The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now
two sub-networks, A and B.
Figure 198 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
314
In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of
27 – 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet’s address itself,
all ones is the subnet’s broadcast address).
192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127
with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP
address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and
the highest is 192.168.1.126.
Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254.
Example: Four Subnets
The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit
address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets,
you need to “borrow” two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01,
10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192.
Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a
host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnet’s broadcast
address).
Table 101 Subnet 1
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address (Decimal) 192.168.1. 0
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. 00000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62
Table 102 Subnet 2
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address 192.168.1. 64
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. 01000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 315
Example: Eight Subnets
Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100,
101, 110 and 111).
The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet.
Table 103 Subnet 3
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address 192.168.1. 128
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. 10000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190
Table 104 Subnet 4
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address 192.168.1. 192
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001
. 11000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111
. 11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254
Table 105 Eight Subnets
SUBNET SUBNET
ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS LAST
ADDRESS BROADCAST
ADDRESS
1 0 1 30 31
232 33 62 63
364 65 94 95
496 97 126 127
5128 129 158 159
6160 161 190 191
7192 193 222 223
8224 225 254 255
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
316
Subnet Planning
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit
network number.
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit
network number.
Configuring IP Addresses
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If
the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP
Table 106 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
1255.255.255.128 (/25) 2126
2255.255.255.192 (/26) 462
3255.255.255.224 (/27) 830
4255.255.255.240 (/28) 16 14
5255.255.255.248 (/29) 32 6
6255.255.255.252 (/30) 64 2
7255.255.255.254 (/31) 128 1
Table 107 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
1255.255.128.0 (/17) 232766
2255.255.192.0 (/18) 416382
3255.255.224.0 (/19) 88190
4255.255.240.0 (/20) 16 4094
5255.255.248.0 (/21) 32 2046
6255.255.252.0 (/22) 64 1022
7255.255.254.0 (/23) 128 510
8255.255.255.0 (/24) 256 254
9255.255.255.128 (/25) 512 126
10 255.255.255.192 (/26) 1024 62
11 255.255.255.224 (/27) 2048 30
12 255.255.255.240 (/28) 4096 14
13 255.255.255.248 (/29) 8192 6
14 255.255.255.252 (/30) 16384 2
15 255.255.255.254 (/31) 32768 1
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 317
addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet
mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you
have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when
the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select
a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned
Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private
use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must
also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the P-870HN-51D.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your P-
870HN-51D that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure
that no other device on your network is using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your P-
870HN-51D will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address
that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the P-
870HN-51D unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are
isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example)
you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three
blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned
from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet
access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for
your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger
organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP
addresses.
Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment,
please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466,
Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
318
IP Address Conflicts
Each device on a network must have a unique IP address. Devices with duplicate
IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other
resources. The devices may also be unreachable through the network.
Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example
More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example
computer A has a static (or fixed) IP address that is the same as the IP address
that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client. Neither can
access the Internet. This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP
address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address
automatically.
Figure 199 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example
Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example
Since a router connects different networks, it must have interfaces using different
network numbers. For example, if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet
(WAN), the router’s LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets. In the
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 319
following example, the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet. The LAN computers
cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks.
Figure 200 Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example
Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example
More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example,
the computer and the router’s LAN port both use 192.168.1.1 as the IP address.
The computer cannot access the Internet. This problem can be solved by
assigning a different IP address to the computer or the router’s LAN port.
Figure 201 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example
Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
320
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 321
APPENDIX E
Wireless LANs
Note: Your specific P-870HN-51D may not support all of the wireless security types
described in this appendix. See the product specifications for more information
about which wireless security types are supported.
Wireless LAN Topologies
This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies.
Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration
The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects
a set of computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless
adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network,
which is commonly referred to as an ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service
Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers
using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN.
Figure 202 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network
BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless
clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one
access point (AP).
Appendix E Wireless LANs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
322
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is
enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate
with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still
access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other.
Figure 203 Basic Service Set
ESS
An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each
containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired
network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS).
This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access
Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate
wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 323
An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and
their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID
in order to communicate.
Figure 204 Infrastructure WLAN
Channel
A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and
receive data. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have
a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a channel different from
an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when
radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and
degrading performance.
Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap,
your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an
adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent
AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11.
RTS/CTS
A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access
point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a
Appendix E Wireless LANs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
324
hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or
wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each
other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore,
they are considered hidden from each other.
Figure 205 RTS/CTS
When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is
already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time,
collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time,
resulting in a loss of messages for both stations.
RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS
defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To
Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked.
When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432
bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS
(Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then
responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range
to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the
requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission.
Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP
without the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on
your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra
network overhead involved in the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send)
handshake.
If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see
next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never
occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could
negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 325
Fragmentation Threshold
A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256
and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will
fragment the packet into smaller data frames.
A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to
interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or
networks that are prone to interference.
If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see
previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send)
handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach
RTS/CTS size.
Preamble Type
Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer
to the length of the synchronization field in a packet.
Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means
more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support
long preamble, but not all support short preamble.
Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices
on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy
wireless networks.
Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it,
and to provide more efficient communications.
Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless
devices on the network support it, otherwise the P-870HN-51D uses long
preamble.
Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to
communicate.
IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an
IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point
(and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has
Appendix E Wireless LANs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
326
several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates.
The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Wireless Security Overview
Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication
between wireless clients, access points and the wired network.
Wireless security methods available on the P-870HN-51D are data encryption,
wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding
the P-870HN-51D identity.
The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security
methods available on your P-870HN-51D.
Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the P-870HN-51D and
on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it.
IEEE 802.1x
In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of
IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional
Table 108 IEEE 802.11g
DATA RATE
(MBPS) MODULATION
1 DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed)
2 DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)
5.5 / 11 CCK (Complementary Code Keying)
6/9/12/18/24/36/
48/54 OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)
Table 109 Wireless Security Levels
SECURITY
LEVEL SECURITY TYPE
Least
Secure
Most Secure
Unique SSID (Default)
Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled
MAC Address Filtering
WEP Encryption
IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server
Authentication
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
WPA2
Appendix E Wireless LANs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 327
accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of
network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:
• User based identification that allows for roaming.
• Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138,
2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network
RADIUS server.
• Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows
additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access
point or the wireless clients.
RADIUS
RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication,
authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the
RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:
• Authentication
Determines the identity of the users.
• Authorization
Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are
connected to the network.
•Accounting
Keeps track of the client’s network activity.
RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay
between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server.
Types of RADIUS Messages
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point
and the RADIUS server for user authentication:
• Access-Request
Sent by an access point requesting authentication.
• Access-Reject
Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access.
• Access-Accept
Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access.
• Access-Challenge
Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access.
The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another
Access-Request message.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
328
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point
and the RADIUS server for user accounting:
•Accounting-Request
Sent by the access point requesting accounting.
• Accounting-Response
Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting.
In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a
shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over
the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is
also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access.
Types of EAP Authentication
This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS,
EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all
authentication types.
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on
top of the IEEE 802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of
user authentication. By using EAP to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS
server, an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform
authentication.
The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an
intermediary AP(s) that supports IEEE 802.1x. .
For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the
network and obtain the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate
(also called digital IDs) can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues
certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner.
EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)
MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The
authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client
‘proves’ that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge
and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text.
However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication
server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus
someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In
addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5
authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5
Appendix E Wireless LANs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 329
authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session
key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption.
EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)
With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless
clients for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client.
After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to
the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured
tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital
certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender’s identity.
However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle
certificates, which imposes a management overhead.
EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)
EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for
only the server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client
authentication is then done by sending username and password through the
secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-
TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP,
CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2.
PEAP (Protected EAP)
Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure
connection, then use simple username and password methods through the
secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity.
However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2
and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is
implemented only by Cisco.
LEAP
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of
IEEE 802.1x.
Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key
expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication
times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed.
If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key
in the wireless security configuration screen. You may still configure and store
keys, but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
330
Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and
PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate
environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair
is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of
authentication types.
WPA and WPA2
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2
(IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption,
authentication and key management than WPA.
Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and
user authentication.
If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external
RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an
external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that
only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless
gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will
be granted access to a WLAN.
If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK
depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not.
Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2.
WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2.
Encryption
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP),
Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when
Table 110 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types
EAP-MD5 EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP LEAP
Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Certificate – Client No Yes Optional Optional No
Certificate – Server No Yes Yes Yes No
Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate
Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate
Client Identity
Protection No No Yes Yes No
Appendix E Wireless LANs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 331
required for compatibility reasons, but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block
chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP).
TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the
authentication server. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that
uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael. They both include a per-
packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an
extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying
mechanism.
WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same
encryption key is never used twice.
The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that
then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to
dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet
that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all
happens in the background automatically.
The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from
capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a
strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each
compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the
data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped.
By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating
an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to
decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break
into the network.
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The
only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common
password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach
makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but it’s
still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent, single, alphanumeric
password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption
keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a
weakness of WEP)
User Authentication
WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to
authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces
the number of key exchange messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake)
and shortens the time required to connect to a network. Other WPA2
authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre-
Appendix E Wireless LANs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
332
authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all
wireless devices.
Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a
successful authentication with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries
to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication
process again.
Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already
connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP
before connecting to it.
Wireless Client WPA Supplicants
A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system
instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most
widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's
Odyssey client.
The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows
XP's built-in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows
XP to use it.
WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number
(default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example
with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is
the distribution system.
1The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server.
2The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and
grants or denies network access accordingly.
3A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by
the RADIUS server and the client.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 333
4The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key
hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate
unique data encryption keys. The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that
is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients.
Figure 206 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
WPA(2)-PSK Application Example
A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows.
1First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared
Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal
characters (including spaces and symbols).
2The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network
only if the password matches.
3The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The
key itself is not sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
334
4The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and
information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They
use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them.
Figure 207 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication
Security Parameters Summary
Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for
each authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address
filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features.
Table 111 Wireless Security Relational Matrix
AUTHENTICATION
METHOD/ KEY
MANAGEMENT
PROTOCOL
ENCRYPTIO
N METHOD ENTER
MANUAL KEY IEEE 802.1X
Open None No Disable
Enable without Dynamic WEP
Key
Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP
Key
Yes Disable
Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP
Key
Yes Disable
WPA TKIP/AES No Enable
WPA-PSK TKIP/AES Yes Disable
WPA2 TKIP/AES No Enable
WPA2-PSK TKIP/AES Yes Disable
Appendix E Wireless LANs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 335
Antenna Overview
An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device
sends an RF signal to the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air.
The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air.
Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a
wireless LAN.
Antenna Characteristics
Frequency
An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz
(IEEE 802.11a) is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN
Radiation Pattern
A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the
antenna’s coverage area.
Antenna Gain
Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF
beam width. Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better
communications.
For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase
of approximately 2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in
gain results in a range increase of approximately 5%. Actual results may vary
depending on the network environment.
Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna
increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic
antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well
in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides.
Types of Antennas for WLAN
There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
336
• Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal
plane. The coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these
antennas ideal for a room environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible
to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points.
• Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does
with the light from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the
coverage pattern. Angles typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to
120 degrees (less directional). Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and
outdoor point-to-point applications.
Positioning Antennas
In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of
obstructions. In point-to–point application, position both antennas at the same
height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance.
For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the
antenna up. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the
antenna down. For a single AP application, place omni-directional antennas as
close to the center of the coverage area as possible.
For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired
coverage area.
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 337
APPENDIX F
Common Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated
protocols and port numbers. For a comprehensive list of port numbers, ICMP type/
code numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority)
web site.
•Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or
create a different one, if you like.
•Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/
UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is
USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number.
•Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. Please refer to RFC 1700 for
further information about port numbers.
•If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
•If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
•Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service
or the situations in which this service is used.
Table 112 Commonly Used Services
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
AH
(IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 51 The IPSEC AH (Authentication
Header) tunneling protocol uses this
service.
AIM/New-ICQ TCP 5190 AOL’s Internet Messenger service. It
is also used as a listening port by
ICQ.
AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some
servers.
BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME TCP
UDP
7648
24032
A popular videoconferencing solution
from White Pines Software.
DNS TCP/UDP 53 Domain Name Server, a service that
matches web names (for example
www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers.
Appendix F Common Services
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
338
ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation
Security Protocol) tunneling protocol
uses this service.
FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related
command that can be used to find out
if a user is logged on.
FTP TCP
TCP
20
21
File Transfer Program, a program to
enable fast transfer of files, including
large files that may not be possible by
e-mail.
H.323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a
client/server protocol for the world
wide web.
HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often
used in e-commerce.
ICMP User-Defined 1Internet Control Message Protocol is
often used for diagnostic or routing
purposes.
ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat
program.
IGMP
(MULTICAST) User-Defined 2Internet Group Management Protocol
is used when sending packets to a
specific group of hosts.
IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm
is used for key distribution and
management.
IRC TCP/UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat
program.
MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks’ messenger
service uses this protocol.
NEW-ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program.
NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups.
NFS UDP 2049 Network File System - NFS is a client/
server distributed file service that
provides transparent file sharing for
network environments.
NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is
the delivery mechanism for the
USENET newsgroup service.
PING User-Defined 1Packet INternet Groper is a protocol
that sends out ICMP echo requests to
test whether or not a remote host is
reachable.
POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a
client computer get e-mail from a
POP3 server through a temporary
connection (TCP/IP or other).
Table 112 Commonly Used Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
Appendix F Common Services
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 339
PPTP TCP 1723 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol
enables secure transfer of data over
public networks. This is the control
channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL
(GRE) User-Defined 47 PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol) enables secure transfer of
data over public networks. This is the
data channel.
RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that
enables real time sound over the web.
REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login.
RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet.
RTSP TCP/UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming (media
control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote
control for multimedia on the
Internet.
SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol.
SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the
message-exchange standard for the
Internet. SMTP enables you to move
messages from one e-mail server to
another.
SNMP TCP/UDP 161 Simple Network Management
Program.
SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP
(RFC:1215).
SQL-NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an
interface to access data on many
different types of database systems,
including mainframes, midrange
systems, UNIX systems and network
servers.
SSH TCP/UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs
to a UNIX server.
TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal
Access Controller Access Control
System).
TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal
emulation protocol common on the
Internet and in UNIX environments. It
operates over TCP/IP networks. Its
primary function is to allow users to
log into remote host systems.
Table 112 Commonly Used Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
Appendix F Common Services
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
340
TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an
Internet file transfer protocol similar
to FTP, but uses the UDP (User
Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP
(Transmission Control Protocol).
VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution.
Table 112 Commonly Used Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 341
APPENDIX G
Open Software Announcements
End-User License Agreement for "P-870HN-51D"
WARNING: ZyXEL Communications Corp. IS WILLING TO
LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION
THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS
LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY
BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO
THEM. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS, THEN ZyXEL,
IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU, IN WHICH
EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE
AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS
ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED.
1Grant of License for Personal Use
ZyXEL Communications Corp. ("ZyXEL") grants you a non-exclusive, non-
sublicense, non-transferable license to use the program with which this license is
distributed (the "Software"), including any documentation files accompanying the
Software ("Documentation"), for internal business use only, for up to the number
of users specified in sales order and invoice. You have the right to make one
backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival, back-up or
disaster recovery purposes. You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted
hereunder. Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by
ZyXEL, and all implied licenses are disclaimed.
2Ownership
You have no ownership rights in the Software. Rather, you have a license to use
the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect.
Ownership of the Software, Documentation and all intellectual property rights
therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL. Any other use of the Software by any
other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement.
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
342
3Copyright
The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by
International Copyright Law and trade secret law, and by international treaty
provisions. All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL.
You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from
any copy of the Software or Documentation
4Restrictions
You may not publish, display, disclose, sell, rent, lease, modify, store, loan,
distribute, or create derivative works of the Software, or any part thereof. You
may not assign, sublicense, convey or otherwise transfer, pledge as security or
otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the
Software. Certain components of the Software, and third party open source
programs included with the Software, have been or may be made available by
ZyXEL listed in the below Table (collectively the "Open-Sourced Components") You
may modify or replace only these Open-Sourced Components; provided that you
comply with the terms of this License and any applicable licensing terms
governing use of the Open-Sourced Components, which have been provided on
the License Notice as below for the Software. ZyXEL is not obligated to provide
any maintenance, technical or other support for the resultant modified Software.
You may not copy, reverse engineer, decompile, reverse compile, translate, adapt,
or disassemble the Software, or any part thereof, nor shall you attempt to create
the source code from the object code for the Software. Except as and only to the
extent expressly permitted in this License, by applicable licensing terms governing
use of the Open-Sourced Components, or by applicable law, you may not market,
co-brand, private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software, or
any part thereof. You may not use the Software, or any part thereof, in the
operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity. You
may not cause, assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing.
Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright
material. Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material
are contained in the License Notice as below for the Software, and your use of
such material is governed by their respective terms. ZyXEL has provided, as part
of the Software package, access to certain third party software as a convenience.
To the extent that the Software contains third party software, ZyXEL has no
express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such
software. Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly
for technical support and customer service related to its software and products.
5Confidentiality
You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL
and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least
as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own
most confidential information. You agree to reasonably communicate the terms
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 343
and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who
come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure
their compliance with such terms and conditions, including, without limitation, not
knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the
purpose of deriving the source code of the Software.
6No Warranty
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY
LAW, ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ZyXEL DOES
NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET
ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL
OPERATE ERROR FREE, OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION, OR THAT ANY
DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE
SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO
BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION, THEN ALL
EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A
PERIOD OF THIRTY (30) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE,
AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD.
7Limitation of Liability
IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF
BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF BUSINESS
INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY, EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. ZyXEL's AGGREGATE
LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR
OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR
OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE, BUT SHALL IN NO
EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT'S PRICE. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
8Export Restrictions
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE
LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF
THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE
IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME. YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE,
DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
344
DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS, REGULATIONS,
ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS. YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST
ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES, DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, COSTS AND EXPENSES,
INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS' FEES, TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS
ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8.
9Audit Rights
ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, UPON REASONABLE PRIOR
NOTICE, TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE
YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT.
10 Termination
This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated. You may terminate this
License Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of
the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control. ZyXEL
may terminate this License Agreement for any reason, including, but not limited
to, if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License
Agreement. Upon notification of termination, you agree to destroy or return to
ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that
all known copies, including backup copies, have been destroyed. All provisions
relating to confidentiality, proprietary rights, and non-disclosure shall survive the
termination of this Software License Agreement.
11 General
This License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by the laws
of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof. The
exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License
Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association
sitting in ROC, Taiwan. This License Agreement shall constitute the entire
Agreement between the parties hereto. This License Agreement, the rights
granted hereunder, the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you
without the prior written consent of ZyXEL. Any waiver or modification of this
License Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both
parties hereto. If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or
unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this License
Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the
parties.
Note: Some components of this product incorporate source code covered under the
open source code licenses. To obtain the source code covered under those
Licenses, please check ZyXEL Technical Support (support@zyxel.com.tw) to
get it.
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 345
Open-Source Packages for "P-870HN-51D"
Notice
Information herein is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and
data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part may
be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, for any purpose, except the express written permission of ZyXEL
Communications Corporation.
This Product includes Bridge-utils 1.2, Busybox 1.0.0, Bftpd 1.0.24, Dnsmasq
2.48, Ebtables 2.0.6, Iproute2 2.4.7, Iptables 1.3.8, MIPS linux kernel 2.6.21.5,
NTFS-3G 1.231, Ppp 2.4.1, Samba 3.0.34, Udhcp 0.9.6 and zebra 0.93a under
below GPL license
3RD PARTY
SOFTWARE VERSION WEB ADDRESS OF THE SOFTWARE LICENSE
TERM
MIPS Linux kernel 2.6.21.5 http://www.linux-mips.org
Bridge-Utils 1.2 http://bridge.sourceforge.net
bftpd 1.0.24 http://www.bftpd.org/
busybox 1'00 http://www.busybox.net/
Dnsmasq 2.48 http://www.thekelleys.org.uk/dnsmasq/
ebtables 2.0.6 http://ebtables.sourceforge.net
iproute2 2.4.7 http://www.linuxgrill.com/anonymous/iproute2
iptables 1.3.8 http://www.netfilter.org
NTFS-3G 1.231 http://www.ntfs-3g.org
openSSL: openSSL
library 0.9.7f http://www.openssl.org/source/license.html
PPP 2.4.1 http://ppp.samba.org/
SSH server:
dropbear 0.46 http://www.opensource.org/licenses/mit-
license.php
Samba 3.0.34 http://www.samba.org
udhcp 0.9.6 http://udhcp.busybox.net/
zebra 0.93a http://www.zebra.org/
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
346
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license
document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share
and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to
guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the
software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the
Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors
commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your
programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our
General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you
receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software
or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these
things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny
you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate
to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you
modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis
or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must
make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show
them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer
you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify
the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the
software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to
know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by
others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to
avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 347
patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we
have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not
licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice
placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this
General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or
work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any
derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program
or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than
copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output
from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether
that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as
you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately
publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty;
keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a
copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus
forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part
contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a
whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you
must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary
way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright
notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a
warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions,
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
348
and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program
itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work
based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections
of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms,
do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But
when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to
each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this
section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another
work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the
Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the
other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section
2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code,
which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any
third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source
distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code,
to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the
information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source
code.(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if
you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in
accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred
form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete
source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the
scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as
a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components
(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable
runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of
executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 349
place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as
expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your
rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program
or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work
based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or
works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program),
the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may
not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this
License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or
for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly
or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any
portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a
whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this
section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting
the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by
public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the
wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is
willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is
believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
350
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries
either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted
only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the
General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in
spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or
concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later
version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that
version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any
version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs
whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of
software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/
OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR
A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 351
IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein, if any, are the property of
their respective owners.
This Product includes Ssh server dropbear v0.46 under the MIT-Style License.
The MIT License
Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the
Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy,
modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEAUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHERLIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE
SOFTWARE.
This Product includes OpenSSL v0.9.7f under the OpenSSL License.
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
352
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed
by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/
)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written
permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may
"OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL
Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL
Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 353
All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with
Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long
as the following conditions are aheared to.
The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4,
RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that
the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are
not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be
given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the
form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or
textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic
software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can
be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related
:-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps
directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product
includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Appendix G Open Software Announcements
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
354
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative
of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put
under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 355
APPENDIX H
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2010 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic,
optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any
products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under
its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right
to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication
is subject to change without notice.
Your use of the P-870HN-51D is subject to the terms and conditions of any related
service providers.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL
Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for
identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.
Certifications
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement
The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
Appendix H Legal Information
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
356
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operations.
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy,
and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which
can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
2Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
3Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
4Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
• This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
• IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-
limited to channels 1 through 11.
• To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation
distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this
device and all persons.
Industry Canada Statement
This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause interference and
2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device
Appendix H Legal Information
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 357
This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum
gain of 2dBi.
Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry
Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms.
To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain
should be so chosen that the EIRP is not more than required for successful
communication.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Device for the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor usage to reduce potential
for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems; users should also
be cautioned to take note that high-power radars are allocated as primary users
(meaning they have priority) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz
and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
IC Radiation Exposure Statement
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. End users must follow the specific operating
instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance.
注意 !
依據 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用
者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
第十四條 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現
有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。
前項合法通信，指依電信規定作業之無線電信。低功率射頻電機須忍
受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
本機限在不干擾合法電臺與不受被干擾保障條件下於室內使用。
減少電磁波影響，請妥適使用。
Notices
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC
region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Appendix H Legal Information
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
358
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
Viewing Certifications
1Go to http://www.zyxel.com.
2Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page.
3Select the certification you wish to view from this page.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from
any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the Warranty Period)
from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your
vendor and/or the authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the
Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of
purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship
and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective
products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever
extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper
operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured
functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the
discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been
modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to
abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of
the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied,
including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or
purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential
damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to
the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://
www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and
information at www.zyxel.com.
Index
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 359
Index
A
ACS 191
Advanced Encryption Standard
See AES.
AES 331
ALG 138
alternative subnet mask notation 312
antenna 247
directional 336
gain 335
omni-directional 336
AP (access point) 323
Application Layer Gateway 138
arp 261
Auto Configuration Server, see ACS 191
B
backup 230
Basic Service Set, See BSS 321
blinking LEDs 24
broadcast 88
BSS 321
C
CA 147, 329
Canonical Format Indicator See CFI
CCMs 235
certificate
details 152
factory default 148
Certificate Authority
See CA.
certificates 147
authentication 147
CA
creating 149
importing 150, 153
public key 147
replacing 148
storage space 148
Certification Authority 147
Certification Authority. see CA
certifications 355
notices 357
viewing 358
CFI 88
CFM 235
CCMs 235
link trace test 236
loopback test 236
MA 235
MD 235
MEP 235
MIP 235
channel 323
interference 323
channel ID 103
command parameters 254
command syntax 254
configuration 92, 95
Connectivity Check Messages, see CCMs
copyright 355
CoS 184
CoS technologies 170
CPU usage 57
creating certificates 149
CTS (Clear to Send) 324
D
date and time 57
default 232
default LAN IP address 47
Index
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
360
DHCP 66, 92, 95, 96, 189
DHCP client 66
DHCP client list 66
DHCP relay 248
DHCP server 248
diagnostic 236
Differentiated Services, see DiffServ 184
DiffServ 184
marking rule 185
digital IDs 147
disclaimer 355
DNS 93
DNS server address assignment 88
Domain Name 139
domain name system
see DNS
Domain Name System. See DNS.
DS field 185
DS, dee differentiated services
DSCP 184
DSL interface 70
dynamic DNS 189
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. See
DHCP.
dynamic WEP key exchange 329
DYNDNS wildcard 189
E
EAP Authentication 328
ECHO 139
Encapsulation 84
MER 84
PPP over Ethernet 85
encryption 330
WEP 107
ESS 322
ESSID 57
Extended Service Set IDentification 104
Extended Service Set, See ESS 322
F
FCC interference statement 355
Finger 139
firmware
upload 228
upload error 229
firmware version 56
fragmentation threshold 325
FTP 130, 139
H
hidden node 323
host 220
host name 56
HTTP 139, 141, 142
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) 228
humidity 247
I
IANA 97, 317
IBSS 321
IEEE 802.11g 325
IEEE 802.1Q 87
IGMP 88, 92, 97
version 88
IGMP proxy 250
IGMP v1 250
IGMP v2 250
importing certificates 150, 153
Independent Basic Service Set
See IBSS 321
initialization vector (IV) 331
install UPnP 199
Windows Me 199
Windows XP 200
Integrated Access Device 21
internal routing table 60
Internet access 21
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
Index
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 361
See IANA 317
IP Address 137
IP address 96
IP Address Assignment 85
IP filter
basics 141
creating or eiding rules 144
introduction 141
policies 142
IP multicasting 250
IP pool 94
IP pool setup 96
ipconfig 255
ipconfig, release 256
ipconfig, renew 256
L
LAN statistics 62, 66
LAN TCP/IP 96
LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration 193
LBR 236
link trace 236
Link Trace Message, see LTM
Link Trace Response, see LTR
logs 223
overview 223
settings 224
Loop Back Response, see LBR
loopback 236
LTM 236
LTR 236
M
MA 235
MAC 56
MAC address 56
MAC address filter action 111
MAC filter 110, 111
Maintenance Association, see MA
Maintenance Domain, see MD
Maintenance End Point, see MEP
managing the device
good habits 22
MD 235
memory usage 57
MEP 235
Message Integrity Check (MIC) 330
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 87
multicast 88, 92, 97
N
NAT 96, 129, 317
default server 137
DMZ host 137
external port 131
internal port 131
port forwarding 130
port number 130, 139
services 139
Symmetric 86
NAT example 139
NAT traversal 197
netstat 265
Network Address Translation, see NAT
network troubleshooting 253
arp 261
ipconfig 255
netstat 265
ping 257
route 262
tracert 259
NNTP 139
O
operation humidity 247
operation temperature 247
P
Packet Transfer Mode 70
Index
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
362
Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 331, 333
Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB 185
PHB 185
ping 257
timeout 258
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 139
POP3 139, 141, 142
ports 24
power adaptor 250
power specifications 247
PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) Link Layer
Protocol 250
PPPoE 85
Benefits 85
PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet)
249
PPTP 139
preamble mode 325
product registration 358
PSK 331
PTM 70
Q
QoS 169, 184
marking 170
priority queue 185
setup 169
tagging 170
versus CoS 170
Quality of Service, see QoS
Quick Start Guide 47
R
RADIUS 327
message types 327
messages 327
shared secret key 328
registration
product 358
related documentation 3
remote management
TR-069 191
Remote Procedure Calls, see RPCs 191
resetting your device 25
restore 230
RFC 1058. See RIP.
RFC 1389. See RIP.
RFC 1631 129
RFC 2131. See DHCP.
RFC 2132. See DHCP
RFC 2516 249
RIP 92, 167
Routing Information Protocol
see RIP
route 262
route status 60
router features 21
routing information 60
Routing Information Protocol. See RIP
RPPCs 191
RTS (Request To Send) 324
threshold 323, 324
S
safety warnings 7
service access control 194
Service Set 104
Services 139
SIP ALG 138
SIP Application Layer Gateway 138
SMTP 139
SNMP 139, 250
SNMP trap 139
static route 159, 163, 167
static VLAN
status indicators 24
storage humidity 247
storage temperature 247
subnet 309
subnet mask 96, 310
subnetting 312
Symmetric NAT 86
Index
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide 363
Symmetric NAT, Outgoing 87
syntax conventions 5
system name 56
T
Tag Control Information See TCI
Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID
TCI
TCP/IP 141
temperature 247
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) 330
TPID 87
TR-064 193
TR-069 191
ACS setup 191
authentication 192
tracert 259
trademarks 355
transparent bridging 250
U
unicast 88
Universal Plug and Play 197
application 198
UPnP 197
forum 198
security issues 198
V
VID
Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN
VLAN 87
Introduction 87
number of possible VIDs
priority frame
static
VLAN ID 87
VLAN Identifier See VID
VLAN tag 87
W
WAN (Wide Area Network) 69
WAN interface 59
WAN statistics 58
warranty 358
note 358
Web Configurator 47
WEP encryption 108
Wi-Fi Protected Access 330
Windows Command Prompt 254
arp 261
command parameters 254
ipconfig 255
netstat 265
ping 257
route 262
tracert 259
wireless client WPA supplicants 332
wireless security 326
wireless station list 61
Wireless tutorial 27
WLAN
interference 323
security parameters 334
WLAN button 25
WPA 330
key caching 332
pre-authentication 332
user authentication 331
vs WPA-PSK 331
wireless client supplicant 332
with RADIUS application example 332
WPA2 330
user authentication 331
vs WPA2-PSK 331
wireless client supplicant 332
with RADIUS application example 332
WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 330
WPA2-PSK 330, 331
application example 333
WPA-PSK 330, 331
application example 333
Index
P-870HN-51D User’s Guide
364
WPS
status 57

Navigation menu